JP2023153259A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by enhancing a degree of attention to a jackpot game and interest in the jackpot game.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 includes a specific character performance in which a selection character image to a selection character selected from a plurality of characters is displayed on a pattern display part 341 and a visual recognition inhibition performance for inhibiting visual recognition of a performance executed by the pattern display part 341 as performances executed in a jackpot game. In the game machine 10, after an execution round of a visual recognition inhibition performance is determined in an opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game, an execution round of a specific character performance is determined to be a round differing from the execution round of a visual recognition inhibition performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 61

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

Generally, in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various characters appear on a display such as a liquid crystal display device as effects for variable games in a normal gaming state. In addition, as a production during a jackpot game, there are some that display still images such as character introduction images in addition to moving images such as PV (promotion video) of characters that appear in the production in variable games (for example, see Patent Document 1) ).

Unexamined Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-47392

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the attention to the jackpot games and the interest in the jackpot games to improve the player's desire to play.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of attention to jackpot games and the interest in jackpot games, thereby increasing the player's desire to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A determining means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the establishment of a determination condition;
main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41);
the special game, and A performance means (341, etc.) by which a game performance (jackpot game performance, variable game performance) is executed in a notification game (variable game) that notifies the determination result;
performance execution means (51) for causing the performance means (341, etc.) to execute the game performance;
Equipped with
The game performance includes, as the game performance executed in the special game, a specific selection subject image production (specific character production) executed in the image display means (341) with the specific selection subject as the subject, and the image display. A visibility inhibiting performance that inhibits the visibility of the performance executed in the means (341),
When executing the visibility inhibiting performance in the special game, the performance execution means (51) sets the timing for executing the visibility inhibiting performance, and then executes the specified at a timing different from the timing for executing the visibility inhibiting performance. The present invention is characterized by having means for setting so that selection-based image rendering is executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the attention to the jackpot game and the interest in the jackpot game, thereby increasing the player's desire to play the jackpot game.

1 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board when the movable accessory member of the game machine shown in FIG. 1 is in a standby position. The front view showing an example of the game board when the movable accessory member is in the operating position. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the start prize winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 9. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first pending command setting process executed in the start winning process of FIG. 10. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 12. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed in the variable game control process of FIG. 13. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process executed in the fluctuation game control process of FIG. 13. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 12. The figure which shows an example of the time chart of the jackpot game performed with the gaming machine shown in FIG. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the opening/closing execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 16. 2 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of operation button operation detection processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 19; 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 19; The figure which shows an example of the operation data table which shows the relationship between a detection pattern and an operation status. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 19. 24 is a diagram showing an example of transition of the display screen on the symbol display section in the game setting process of FIG. 23. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part in the game setting process of FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game start standby process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the top menu screen process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting screen process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of character selection screen processing executed in the game setting processing of FIG. 23. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 19; 31 is a diagram showing an example of a table that is referred to when a variable command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 30; FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a table that is referred to when a variable command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 30; FIG. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 30. The figure which shows an example of the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 5R referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 33. The figure which shows an example of the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 16R referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 33. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the visual recognition inhibition performance determination process executed in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 33. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a round game in which a scenario of an opening/closing execution mode performance determined in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 33 and a visibility obstructing performance is executed, and (B) is an example of a round game performance screen. figure. A diagram showing an example of a promotion performance executed as a visibility inhibition performance in a jackpot game performance. The figure which shows an example of the hold consecutive winnings confirmation performance performed as a visibility obstruction performance in a jackpot game performance. A diagram showing an example of a specific number of balls displayed as a visual recognition inhibiting performance in a jackpot game performance. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of an error processing procedure executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 19; 20 is a flowchart showing an example of an error processing procedure executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 19; A diagram showing an example of an error display executed as a visual recognition obstructing performance in a jackpot game performance. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game performance process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 19. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball display performance process executed in the jackpot game process of FIG. 44. A flowchart showing an example of the round game performance process executed in the jackpot game process of FIG. 44. The figure which shows an example of the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 5R referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 16R referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of a visual recognition inhibiting effect determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of an error processing procedure executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. 51 is a diagram showing an example of an error display on a symbol display section in the error processing of FIG. 50; FIG. 51 is a diagram showing another example of error display on the symbol display section in the error processing of FIG. 50; FIG. Flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of jackpot game effect determination processing executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of an error processing procedure executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a jackpot game effect determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the jackpot game character performance data table referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 55. The figure which shows an example of the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 55. The figure which shows an example of the jackpot game character performance data table referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the jackpot game character performance data table referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a ball display effect process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of jackpot game effect determination processing executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 5R referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 61. The figure which shows an example of the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 16R referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 61.

Hereinafter, first to sixth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to provide an understanding of the present invention. Furthermore, the following embodiments are examples of embodying the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 46.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are exploded views of the gaming machine 10, and FIGS. 4 and 5 are front views of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment are defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine, but other games such as a reel-type game machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball game machine, and a play ball game machine can also be used. The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by having its left end rotatably supported by the outer frame 14 . Moreover, the left end portion of the inner frame 12 is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12 by having its left end rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection determining section 21, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination section 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 6) that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not it is pressed. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20. This operation button 20 may be used as an operation button performance that is triggered by a player's operation on the operation button 20 during a predetermined specific period in a variable game performance, for example, as a promotion performance as a visibility obstructing performance (FIG. 38). (Reference) etc.). Further, the operation button 20 is operated to shift the display screen on the symbol display section 341 (described later) from the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25(A)) to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(B)). Ru.

Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, but may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, the operation switch 20a is not limited to a contact type switch, and may be a piezoelectric element, for example, as long as it can be used to detect whether or not an operation is performed by a player.

Furthermore, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel may be provided that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player. Furthermore, in place of the operation button 20, a panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting a player's touch operation on the panel 25 may be provided. Further, the operation button 20 may include a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or panel 25 in the variable game presentation will be reflected in the operation button presentation and the like.

The selection determining unit 21 is operated by the player, and is a push button that accepts a push operation from the player in a game setting process (see FIG. 23), which will be described later. The selection deciding section 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a decision button 21B.

The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player in order to temporarily select a desired item from options (items) such as the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(B)) in the game setting process. It includes an upper selection button 211, a lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 is an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d (Fig. 6 ). Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the operating state (operated or not operated) of each of the selection buttons 211 to 214.

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the provisionally selected item. Further, the decision button 21B includes a decision operation switch 21Ba that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the operating state (operated or not operated) of the determination button 21B.

Furthermore, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the decision button 21B, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player may be provided as the operation means. Furthermore, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the decision button 21B, it is also conceivable that the panel 25 and a touch sensor that detects the player's touch operation on the panel 25 are provided as the operation means. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214).

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by a player to fire a game ball. In the game machine 10, a basic game is played by firing a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player operates the firing handle 22, the game ball firing mechanism 32 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls put out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130, which will be described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a line. It is used to guide the game ball to the game ball firing mechanism 32. Further, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23 and is used to store surplus game balls in the upper tray 23.

The panel 25 is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and include variable game performance processing (step S1911 in FIG. 19), jackpot game performance processing (step S1912 in FIG. 19, see FIG. 44), etc. In addition to executing a sound effect that outputs a sound in , when an error occurs, a sound is output to notify that an error has occurred. Note that the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination section 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp or an LED, and performs a lamp effect by lighting mode such as lighting or blinking.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball firing mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. Note that, in FIG. 2, the description on the surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 includes a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first operating opening 314, a second operating opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, An outlet 318, a variable display unit 34, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display section 37, and a movable accessory member 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. be done.

Here, the game ball firing mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The firing rail 321 is formed from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and directs the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is something that guides. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the firing rail 321 one ball at a time. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for firing the game ball supplied onto the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the player's operation of the firing handle 22, and game balls are fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 onto the game board 31. In addition, the game ball firing mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that fires the game balls using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIGS. 4 and 5, the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 have openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front and back direction. is formed. And, on the back side of the game board 31, it is possible to individually detect the entry of game balls corresponding to the general winning hole 313, the first operating hole 314, the second operating hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 6) are provided. Further, the through gate 317 is a gate through which game balls can pass, and has an entrance sensor 317a (see FIG. 6) that can individually detect game balls passing through the through gate 317. On the game board 31, when the game ball sent out to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball is hit to the right, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the through gate 317.

The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a (see FIG. 6) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, the detection of the ball entering the game ball by the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. Note that the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensor capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls by other detection methods.

Further, the second operating port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b that switches whether or not to restrict the entry of game balls into the second operating port 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, when the electric accessory 315b opens, the game ball can enter the second operating port 315, and when the electric accessory 315b closes, the game ball can enter the second operating port 315. Balls are limited.

Further, the variable winning hole 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 316b that switches whether or not to restrict the entry of game balls into the variable winning hole 316. The opening/closing door 316b is opened/closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, when the opening/closing door 316b opens, it becomes possible for a game ball to enter the variable winning hole 316, and when the opening/closing door 316b closes, the entering of the game ball into the variable winning hole 316 is restricted. Ru.

In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of a game ball into the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 is detected by the ball entering sensor 314a or the ball entering sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery. The main control unit 331 then controls the display on the main display section 37 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Further, the lottery results from the main control unit 331 are transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display on the variable display unit 34, etc. according to the lottery results.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the ball entering sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the general winning hole 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the first operating hole 314 or the second operating hole 315 is three, and the number of winning balls when the ball enters the variable winning hole 316. In this case, the number of prize balls is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result conducted by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game enters a jackpot gaming state (special gaming state), and the variable prize opening 316 is opened for round gaming (unit gaming). ) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 or 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. If the lottery result is a win, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot game state is an opening/closing execution in which a round game (unit game) in which the variable winning hole 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number or more game balls enter the variable winning hole 316 is played five times. This is a gaming state including modes. The 16R guaranteed variable jackpot gaming state is a gaming state that includes an opening/closing execution mode in which round games (unit games) are played 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot gaming state. This is a gaming state advantageous to the player.

The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display section 341, such as a liquid crystal display, arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in the approximate center of the game board 31. The symbol display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the symbol display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display section 341, a symbol variation display and a variable game are displayed in accordance with the lottery result of a jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to a ball entering the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315. Various displays such as performance displays are performed. Note that the symbol display section 341 is an example of an image display means of the present invention, and constitutes a presentation means of the present invention. Further, the symbol display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, and an organic EL display. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide one or more sub-display sections in addition to the symbol display section 341. The sub-display section is arranged, for example, at the top, bottom, left, or right of the symbol display section 341. The sub-display section may be movable between a position that covers the symbol display section 341 and a position that does not cover the symbol display section 341. Further, the sub-display section may be arranged on the upper tray 23. Note that the sub-display section may constitute the image display means of the present invention alone or together with the symbol display section 341.

For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols numbered, for example, from "1" to "9" in the vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, etc. Note that sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the main symbols. Further, in this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9".

In the gaming machine 10, in the variable game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols stops after a preset variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341. . More specifically, in the symbol variation display, all the main symbols first vary along a preset variation direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and then the variation of the plurality of main symbols stops in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbols on all lines stops and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the symbol fluctuation display ends.

When the symbol variation display on the symbol display section 341 ends, the symbol display section 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are lined up on one or more active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol clearly or suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, if the lottery result is "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", "16R sure strange jackpot", or "5R regular jackpot", the main symbols of the same pattern will be displayed lined up on active lines, clearly indicating that it is a jackpot. be done. Further, the jackpot type may be clearly indicated by the combination of main symbols on the active line, but it is not necessarily clearly indicated. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result is a ``16R guaranteed variable jackpot'', the symbol combinations, such as ``777'', which are set as a symbol combination indicating a 16R guaranteed variable jackpot among the main symbols, are lined up on the active line. is displayed, or combinations of the same symbols other than "777" are displayed on active lines. In addition, if the lottery result is a "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", a state in which symbol combinations such as "333", which are set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a 5R guaranteed strange jackpot among the main symbols, are lined up on an active line is displayed. Or, a state in which combinations of the same symbols other than symbol combinations indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot such as "777" or "333" are lined up on an active line is displayed. In addition, if the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", among the main symbols, combinations of symbols that have been set in advance as symbol combinations indicating normal jackpots, such as "222" and "444", other than symbol combinations indicating variable probability jackpots. A state in which combinations of the same symbols are lined up on an active line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "lost", a state in which different combinations of main symbols are lined up on active lines (for example, "323" or "723", etc.) is displayed.

Further, in the symbol display section 341, together with the symbol variation display in the variable game, a variable game performance that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is displayed. In addition, if the lottery result is "16R guaranteed variable jackpot" and a jackpot symbol combination other than the main symbol combination indicating a 16R probable variable jackpot is displayed lined up on the active line, a 5R guaranteed variable jackpot will be issued as a variable game effect. Or, a suggestion effect suggesting a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the variable game performance or the jackpot game performance, a promotion performance or the like is executed that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable jackpot. Similarly, if the lottery result is "5R regular jackpot" and a state where jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combinations indicating a probability jackpot are displayed on the active line, a 5R regular jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. A suggestive effect suggesting that is the case is executed. In this case, in the variable game performance or the jackpot game performance, a promotion performance or the like is executed that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variable jackpot.

Further, in the symbol display section 341, when the gaming state shifts to a jackpot gaming state, jackpot game performances including an opening performance, an opening/closing execution mode performance, and an ending performance are displayed. On the other hand, when a variable game performance or a jackpot game performance is not displayed (in a non-gaming state), the display screen of the symbol display section 341 is changed to the top menu screen 72 (FIG. 25(B)) by the player's operation on the operation button 20. )). In addition, by operating the selection decision section 21 (the plural selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the decision button 21B), the display screen in the symbol display section 341 can be changed from the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(B)) to the character It is possible to move to another display screen on which game settings can be made, such as the selection screen 74 (see FIG. 25(D)). In the present embodiment, by operating the selection decision section 21 (the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the decision button 21B), a plurality of characters (specific selection subjects) are displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the variable game performance. It is possible to set a character to be selected from characters (selection). Note that details of character settings will be described later with reference to FIG. 29 and the like.

The magnet sensor 35 is provided around the first operating port 314 and on the back side of the game board 31. The magnet sensor 35 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the magnet sensor 35 is input to the main control unit 331. Thereby, if an attempt is made to fraudulently guide a game ball to the first operating port 314 using a magnet, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act. In addition, the magnet sensor 35 may be provided around the variable winning hole 316. Thereby, in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game, when an act of winning game balls that greatly exceeds the upper limit number in the variable winning hole 316 is performed, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act.

The radio wave sensor 36 is provided around the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 on the back side of the game board 31. The radio wave sensor 36 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor 36 is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect the fraudulent act in the event that an act of illegally inputting radio waves to the ball entering sensors 314a, 315a causes false detection of the entering of a game ball. Note that the radio wave sensor 36 is capable of detecting radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz. Further, a radio wave sensor 36 may be similarly provided around the special winning opening 319b.

The main display section 37 includes an LED pair 371 arranged at the upper right corner of the game board 31, two 7-segment displays 372 and 373, and an LED group 374. The LED pair 371 is triggered by winning the through gate 317, and displays the result of a lottery in the main control unit 331 to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b by a combination of lights on and off (lighting pattern). In the 7-segment display 372, symbols are displayed in a variable manner triggered by winning into the first operating port 314, and symbols corresponding to the lottery results in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 are stopped and displayed. In the 7-segment display 373, a variable display of symbols is performed using the win to the second operating port 315 as a trigger, and a symbol according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the pending number N and the pending number M of the variable display caused by winning the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 are displayed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs.

The movable accessory member 39 is a decorative member that can operate in a predetermined manner in the gaming machine 10 and is generally also referred to as an "accessory". In this embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 has a predetermined standby position located above the symbol display section 341 (see FIG. 4) and an actuation position set below the standby position (see FIG. 5). It is movable along the surface of the symbol display section 341 between. At the standby position shown in FIG. 4, a part of the movable accessory member 39 is exposed through the opening 31A, and most of the movable accessory member 39 is hidden around the opening 31A. Therefore, in the standby position, the movable accessory member 39 hardly obstructs the visual recognition of the image effect executed on the symbol display section 341. On the other hand, in the operating position shown in FIG. 5, the movable accessory member 39 covers the central part of the symbol display section 341, and the visual recognition of the image effect executed on the symbol display section 341 is obstructed. That is, the movable accessory actuation effect that moves the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the actuation position is an example of the visibility obstructing effect of the present invention. Moreover, the movable accessory member 39 is an example of the movable member of the present invention, and constitutes the presentation means of the present invention.

In addition, the movable accessory member 39 may be entirely hidden without being exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position. Further, the gaming machine 10 may include a plurality of movable accessory members 39. Furthermore, the movable accessory member 39 may be one in which a plurality of separated movable members are combined, one that can be transformed into two or more forms, or one that is equipped with a display such as a liquid crystal display device. Of course, the movable accessory member 39 is not limited to covering a part of the display screen of the symbol display section 341, but may cover the entire display screen.

Such a movable accessory member 39 is controlled to operate in a presentation for showing a lottery result in a jackpot lottery in a variable game. In particular, the movable accessory member 39 is operated as a confirmation effect indicating that the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is a win, and also as a chance-up effect when the probability of the lottery being a jackpot is high. There are many things. In addition, in this embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 is operated in the promotion performance and the held consecutive winnings confirmation performance, which will be described later, in the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 6, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor 39a that supplies driving force to the movable accessory member 39, and a return detection unit 39b that detects that the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position. has. The motor 39a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection section 39b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. The movable accessory member 39 and the motor 39a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the movable accessory member 39 is directed from the standby position to the operating position according to the rotational direction of the motor 39a. or upward from the operating position to the standby position.

The gaming machine 10 also includes a motor driver 39c to which a motor 39a and a return detection section 39b are connected. The motor driver 39c is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. The motor driver 39c then controls the motor 39a according to control instructions from the audio lamp control device 5. Further, the motor driver 39c can acquire the detection result by the return detection section 39b and transmit it to the audio lamp control device 5. Note that the motor 39a and the return detection section 39b may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 and controlled by the audio lamp control device 5.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23. Note that when the game balls in the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.

As shown in FIG. 6, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The firing control device 8 controls the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation of the firing handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage level to a control device and a driving means provided within the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that performs main control of games in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. Furthermore, the MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4. Further, the input/output I/F 42 is connected to ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display section 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ball has entered the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a. to judge. Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether there is any fraudulent activity using a magnet or radio waves based on detection signals from the magnet sensor 35 and the radio wave sensor 36. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, the power supply control device 9, etc. are connected to the input/output I/F 42.

Then, the MPU 41 sends the voice lamp control device 5 a variable pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, a round game start command, an ending start command, and a variable winning command. Outputs commands such as winning entry command, error occurrence command, and error resolution command.

The variable pattern command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of the variable display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information regarding the jackpot type if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is executed in step S1612 in the variation start process in FIG. 15 based on information stored in the hold storage area 412b, which will be described later, when starting the symbol variation display by the symbol display section 341 and the main display section 37. It is set in . Note that the variation pattern command may be a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 only of the variation display time. In this case, a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result and jackpot type in the jackpot lottery is set as a command different from the fluctuation pattern command.

When the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M stored in the reservation storage area 412b (described later) increases, the first reservation command and the second reservation command are used to generate a lottery result in a jackpot lottery for the increased reservation, a fluctuation pattern, and a change pattern. This is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of reservations N or M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on information stored in the hold storage area 412b, which will be described later, when the hold count N or the hold count M increases (the first hold command in FIG. Step S1207 or Step S1209 of the pending command setting process).

The shift command indicates the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 when the reservation number N or the reservation number M decreases. This is a command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the validity information has shifted. The shift command is set in step S1512 in the data setting process in FIG.

The jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game will start, that is, the gaming state will shift to the jackpot gaming state. It is set in step S1702 in the game control process. In addition, since the jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game will start, the audio lamp control device 5 starts the jackpot game by receiving the jackpot game start command. Not only that, but also that the opening will begin. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the opening command may cause the audio lamp control device 5 to recognize that the opening has started.

The jackpot game end command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game ends, that is, the gaming state shifts from the jackpot gaming state to another gaming state, and is executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. is set in step S1723.

The round game start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of starting each round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and round information indicating what round the round game is, It is set in step S1813 in the opening/closing execution mode control process in FIG. Note that the audio lamp control device 5 can grasp that the opening ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started by the round game start command, but apart from the round game start command, an opening end command is set at the end of the opening, Alternatively, an opening/closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening/closing execution mode is started. Further, apart from the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the time of starting the round game, and the command may be sent to the audio lamp control device 5.

The ending start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the ending has started, that is, the opening/closing execution mode has ended, and when starting the ending, step S1718 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. It is set in .

The variable winning hole winning command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that a game ball has won in the variable winning hole 316, and when a game ball has won in the variable winning hole 316, the prize ball command setting process ( It is set in step S1303) in FIG.

The error occurrence command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that an error has occurred, and when an error occurs, the error determination process (step S1007 in FIG. 9) is executed as an error occurrence command according to the type of error. ).

The error resolution command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the error has been resolved. When the error is resolved, the error determination process in FIG. 9 (step S1007) is executed as an error resolution command according to the type of error. ).

Note that commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the audio lamp control device 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

The main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs the changed clock signal to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 performs the main timer assignment described below every time the clock signal rises (or falls). Assume that the process is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply the operation clock for the control main body in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery and the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the power hold area 412c of the RAM 412 to execute the jackpot lottery and setting of the variable display time.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used in the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the type of jackpot, and a reach random number counter C3 used when determining the type of loss. included. The lottery counter 412a also includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 that determines the variation display time in the main display section 37 and the symbol display section 341. It will be done. Furthermore, the lottery counter 412a includes a normal winning random number counter C4 used for drawing whether or not to make the electric accessory 315b of the second actuation port 315 into an electrically winning role open state, and an initial value setting of the normal winning random number counter C4. A normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for this purpose is included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they will simply be abbreviated as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and the counters return to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referenced by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time.

The reservation storage area 412b includes a first reservation storage area REA, a second reservation storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reservation storage area REA includes a first reservation area REA1, a second reservation area REA2, a third reservation area REA3, a fourth reservation area REA4, and a reservation number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is held based on each value stored in the first reservation storage area REA, and the 7-segment display 372 displays a variable display and a static display may be referred to as a first special symbol game. be. The second reservation storage area REB includes a first reservation area REB1, a second reservation area REB2, a third reservation area REB3, a fourth reservation area REB4, and a reservation number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is held based on each value stored in the second reservation storage area REB and the 7-segment display 373 displays a variable display and a static display may be referred to as a second special symbol game. be.

When a game ball enters the first operating port 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is This information is acquired as win/fail information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA. In addition, when a game ball enters the second operating port 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is This information is acquired as the winning/failure information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. The acquisition process of the validity information is executed by the MPU 41, which functions as the determining means of the present invention, by executing the process according to the control program. Note that the lottery counters 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, fluctuation type counter CS1, etc.) are individually set for each of the first reservation storage area REA and the second reservation storage area REB. may be provided.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area of the first holding storage area REA. It is stored in any one of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reservation storage area REB.

Therefore, the jackpot lottery for the variable game executed based on the win/fail information stored in the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first actuating port 314, the success/failure information indicates that the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4 are vacant in priority order. It is stored in the area where the data is stored. In the reservation number storage area NAA, the number of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 for which validity information is stored is stored as the reservation number N.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second operating port 315, the win/fail information indicates that the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4 are vacant in priority order. stored in the area. In the reservation number storage area NAB, the number of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 for which validity information is stored is stored as the reservation number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first operating port 314 is stored in a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4. It is possible to hold up to four pieces of winning/losing information as the winning history of game balls entered into the second operating port 315.

In addition, as another embodiment, it is possible that the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 are provided with a holding area where the maximum number of holding areas is eight, and even in this case, the total number of holding areas is up to eight. It is possible to hold the winning/failure information as the winning history. The storage process of the validity information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA or the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB when the symbol variation display in the main display section 37 and the symbol display section 341 is started. This is a storage area used to move the validity information stored in the . Specifically, the validity information of the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is prioritized and moved to the execution area AE, and the validity information does not exist in the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB. When the pending number storage area NAB is 0, the validity information of the first pending area REA1 in the first pending storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

Note that the difference between the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAA of the first reservation storage area REA and the number of reservations N stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB of the second reservation storage area REB is 2 or more. In this case, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the value of the reservation area with a larger number is given priority and moved to the execution area AE. In another embodiment, the validity information of the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA and the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB may be alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on numerical information stored as win/fail information in the execution area AE. At this time, if the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the validity information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, and the third The validity information stored in the reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the validity information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the validity information stored in the second reservation area REB2 is shifted to the first reservation area REB1 and the third reservation area REB1 is moved to the execution area AE. The validity information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the validity information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 738, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

The value of the random number that results in a jackpot is determined by the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area in the ROM 411 in the low probability mode (first notification gaming state) which is the normal gaming state and the high probability mode (second notification gaming state) which is the variable probability gaming state. Two types are set corresponding to the notification game state). Here, FIG. 8(A) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode validity table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 8(B) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability mode validity table corresponding to the high probability mode. In the example shown in FIGS. 8(A) and 8(B), the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the low probability mode is a jackpot is 2 (373, 727), and in the high probability mode, the number of random numbers is 2 (373, 727). The number of random numbers for which the lottery result is a jackpot is 13 (59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 373, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 727). Here, in the low probability mode success/failure table and the high probability mode success/failure table, two random numbers (373, 727) for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot are common, but it is also possible that they are not common. Further, the random numbers that result in a jackpot win may not be discrete values, but may be partially or completely continuous values. Note that if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers that result in a jackpot win, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

The jackpot type counter C2 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315. In the gaming machine 10, the values of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to two types of jackpots, variable jackpot and normal jackpot, are set according to the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area in the ROM 411. Here, FIG. 8(C) is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 8(C), when the type of variable game is the first special symbol game, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 from 0 to 9, and the number of random numbers that produce a 16R probability variable jackpot. There are five random numbers from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that usually result in a jackpot in 5R is five from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of variable game is the second special symbol game, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R variable jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and the number of random numbers that result in a 16R variable jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14. There are 5 random numbers from 15 to 19 that usually result in a jackpot in 5R. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop variable machine in which the probability of a variable jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a 16R probability variable jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that in the first special symbol. That is, in the variable time-saving gaming state, the expected value of acquiring game balls when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is set higher than in normal gaming states such as the normal time-saving gaming state and the normal non-time-saving gaming state. ing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first operating port 314 is an opportunity to execute the first special symbol game when a game ball wins, and the second operating port 314 is an opportunity to execute a second special symbol game when a game ball wins. An individual distribution table is set for each 315, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315. It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same between the game and the second special symbol game. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop-probability machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a type-two type mixed machine, and the like.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot". It is determined whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss".

Here, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened is repeated five times. Further, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability-variable jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

In the case of a 5R fixed variable jackpot or a 16R fixed variable jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game there is a high probability mode (second notification game state) where the probability of winning the jackpot is high and a fixed variable which is a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b. Shift to time saving mode. The probability variable time saving mode continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of 5R normal jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, there is a low probability mode (first notification game state) where the probability of winning the jackpot is low and a normal time saving mode which is a high frequency support mode where the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high. is executed. The high-frequency support mode in the normal time-saving mode continues until the jackpot lottery is completed a preset number of times, for example, 50 or 100 times.

By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability changing machine, after the end of the jackpot game at the time of the probability variable jackpot, a jackpot lottery is performed a preset number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times). is executed in variable time saving mode (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), then shifts to low probability mode and ends high frequency support mode. In addition, it is also possible as another embodiment to conduct a lottery from the probability variable time saving mode to the normal time saving mode or the low probability mode in the variable game. In addition, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss, the transition to the jackpot game state and high-frequency support mode is not made. In this embodiment, a case will be described in which the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpots: a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, and a 5R normal jackpot. It is also possible to have other jackpot types such as round normal jackpot and 16R normal jackpot.

Further, the reach random number counter C3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly and is stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss is selected by the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, according to the out-of-reach type table stored in the out-of-reach type table storage area in the ROM 411, after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops before and after the out-of-reach pattern, and a reach also occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of three types of out-of-reach is set, including a reach other than before and after out-of-reach where the final stop symbol stops at a place other than before and after the reach-in symbol after the end of the reach, and a complete out-of-reach where no reach occurs. Here, FIG. 8(D) is a diagram showing an example of a deviation type table. In the example shown in FIG. 8(D), the random number values that result in a reach that is out of order are 0 to 8, the values of random numbers that are a reach that is not out of the front or back are 9 to 38, and the values of random numbers that are completely out of reach are 39. ~238. The MPU 41 determines that in a variable game in which a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, in a variable game that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, a reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, reach refers to a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbols that indicates winning the jackpot is likely to occur from the start of the fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol display section 341 until the symbols are stopped and displayed. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is in a state of fluctuation. Furthermore, while the reach on the symbol display section 341 is in a fluctuating state, a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the level of expectation, or a story production process in which the player's operation of the operation button 20 is reflected in the production. Participatory operation performance processing and the like are executed. Note that during execution of these production processes, the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner.

For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 412c. For example, if the electric accessory release counter C4 is between 0 and 199, it is possible that you have won, and when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is between 200 and 250, you are considered to have lost.

The variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines rough variation types such as so-called normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. as a variable game performance. The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the MPU 41 executes a main process to be described later, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Further, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating a variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern while referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table, or a miss variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these fluctuation tables may be provided separately for each low probability mode and high probability mode. Further, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

Here, FIG. 8(E), FIG. 8(F), and FIG. 8(G) are diagrams showing examples of a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table, and a loss variation table. As shown in FIG. 8(E), FIG. 8(F), and FIG. 8(G), in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variable jackpot variation table, and the loss variation table, the variation pattern is set in advance according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. are associated. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R regular jackpot", the normal jackpot fluctuation table, and when the lottery result is "5R definite strange jackpot" or "16R definite strange jackpot", the MPU 41 uses the regular jackpot fluctuation table, lottery If the result is "missing", refer to each missing variation table and identify the type of variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8(E) and 8(F), in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variable jackpot variation table, variation patterns "01" to "03" are used depending on the value of the variation type counter CS1. One of them is selected. When the variation pattern "01" is selected here, the symbol display section 341 executes a variation display in a normal reach mode with a variation display time of 30 seconds. Further, when the variation pattern "02" is selected, the symbol display section 341 executes a variation display in a super reach mode in which the variation display time is 60 seconds. Furthermore, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the symbol display section 341 executes the variation display in a special reach mode in which the variation display time is the longest, 90 seconds. Note that the types of variation patterns are not limited to these. Further, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reaches with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reaches corresponding to the variation pattern "01", and one of the normal reaches selected from among them is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of super reaches with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the super reach corresponding to the variation pattern "02", and one of the super reaches selected from among them is executed. Ru. Super reach is a reach that has a longer variation time than normal reach and shorter variation time than special reach, and has a higher probability (expectation level) that the lottery result will be a jackpot than normal reach, and has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than special reach. This is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation level) of the game is low.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of special reaches with different characters and stories are prepared as special reaches corresponding to the variation pattern "03", and any special reach selected from among them is executed. Ru. The special reach is a reach that has a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach and the super reach, and includes, for example, a performance that develops from the normal reach or the super reach.

Note that the reach corresponding to the fluctuation pattern includes a single operation performance in which a single operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the performance, a continuous hit operation performance in which the player's repeated operations on the operation button 20 are reflected in the performance, and a game. The game may include a player-participatory operation performance such as a long-press operation performance in which a long-press operation of the operation button 20 by a player is reflected in the performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8(G), in the deviation variation table, for each stop type at the time of deviation determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3 (front/back deviation reach, reach other than front/back deviation, complete deviation), the variation type is A correspondence relationship between the counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern is determined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of deviation is front/back off reach or front/back off reach, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, if the stop type at the time of failure is complete failure, either the fluctuation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Note that when the variation pattern "04" is selected, the symbol display section 341 executes a variation display with a variation display time of 7 seconds and without a reach. Further, when the variation pattern "05" is selected, the symbol display section 341 executes a variation display with a variation display time of 10 seconds and without a reach.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as a variable display at the time of a miss corresponding to the variation pattern "04", a variable display of a miss pattern in which the fluctuating display stops at the missed symbol without accompanying a preview effect in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed. is executed. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, as a fluctuating display at the time of a miss corresponding to the fluctuating pattern "05", a fluctuating display of a miss pattern in which the fluctuating display stops at the missed symbol is accompanied by a preview effect in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed. executed. Furthermore, when the fluctuation display is displayed when the game is out corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "05", a player participation type operation performance that reflects the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a preview performance.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern indicating the variation display time on the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 41 issues a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. input to the audio lamp control device 5; Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 issues a variable pattern command "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot before the variable patterns "01" to "03". Outputs one of "A01" to "A03". In addition, when the lottery result is a "5R definite strange jackpot", the MPU 41 generates a fluctuation pattern command "B01" with "B" indicating that it is a 5R definite strange jackpot in front of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". ~Output one of "B03". Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "16R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 generates a variation pattern command "C01" with "C" indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot in front of the variation patterns "01" to "03". ~Output one of "C03". In addition, if the lottery result is a "loser", the MPU 41 sends variable pattern commands "D01" to "D05" with "D" added to the front of the variation patterns "01" to "05" to indicate a "loser". Output one of the following. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuating display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the symbol display section 341 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. Determine the details of the variation mode, such as the variation type and performance type displayed in . Then, the audio lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display section 341 to execute a variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, plays audio from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and lights up or blinks the illumination section 27. , turn off the lights.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 executes a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) for the variation display on the symbol display section 341 based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table. It turns out. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display section 341 are determined by the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control unit 332 is equipped with a sound lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on the control signal input from the main control unit 331, the symbol fluctuation display and the Execute the performance display.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Furthermore, the MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp blinking patterns used in variable game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 sends commands to the display control device 6 based on commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4 by having the MPU 51 execute processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 511. (control signal) to control the display on the symbol display section 341. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the playback audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination section 27 in accordance with the display on the symbol display section 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls image display on the symbol display section 341, playback audio output from the speaker 26, and blinking mode of the illumination section 27 when executing a variable game performance and a jackpot game performance that will be described later.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the audio lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Then, from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end Commands such as a command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a variable winning opening command, an error occurrence command, and an error resolution command are input. Further, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs display variation pattern commands and the like to the display control device 6. Note that another embodiment may include a configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5. Moreover, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes one control device having the functions of both the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also considered as another embodiment.

Further, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the motor driver 39c. In the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the audio output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination section 27, etc. based on commands input from the main control device 4. Furthermore, the MPU 51 can operate the movable accessory member 39 (see FIGS. 4 and 5) by controlling the motor 39a via the motor driver 39c, and can obtain the detection result by the return detection unit 39b. It is possible to determine whether the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby state. Further, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to an operation switch 20a, an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, a right selection operation switch 211d, and a decision operation switch 21Ba. Thereby, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20, the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214), and the decision button 21B have been operated, and based on the detection result, the MPU 51 executes the operation on the symbol display section 341. It is also possible to control the game performance, the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination section 27, etc.

The MPU 51 receives a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, an open/close actual mode start command, and an open/close actual mode end command input from the main controller 4. , a round game start command, a round game end command, a variable winning opening winning command, and other commands to perform predetermined arithmetic processing.

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 creates a variation pattern (main symbol stop symbol combination, variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 31(B))) based on the variation pattern command, and The production type (see FIGS. 32(A) to 32(C)) is determined, and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is sent to the display control device 6 (from step S2703 in the command determination process in FIG. 30). (see S2705), starts symbol variation display on the symbol display section 341. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, when the variable pattern command indicates a miss, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the miss is displayed. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command indicates a 5R normal jackpot, a combination of main symbols corresponding to a 5R normal jackpot is displayed, and when it indicates a 5R variable probability jackpot, a combination of main symbols corresponding to a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R variable probability jackpot is displayed. is displayed, and when indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot, a combination of main symbols corresponding to a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed. In addition, when the variable pattern command includes information regarding the jackpot type, the MPU 51 stores the information regarding the jackpot type in the RAM 512, and when determining the jackpot game performance when the jackpot game start command is received, the MPU 51 stores the information regarding the jackpot type in the RAM 512. The stored information regarding the jackpot type is referred to (see step S2804 in the jackpot game performance determination process in FIG. 33).

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command etc. inputted from the audio lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input/output I/F 62, etc., and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display section 341 are connected to the input/output I/F 62. Note that bidirectional communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a 1-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 contains variable symbols such as the main symbol used in the symbol variation display of the symbol display section 341, a preview effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, a miss effect image, and an opening used in the jackpot game effect. A plurality of types of images are stored, such as a performance image, an opening/closing performance performance image, an ending performance image, a top menu image used in game settings, a game setting image developed from the top menu image, and a character setting image. Note that the images displayed on the symbol display section 341 include still images and moving images. In this embodiment, at least the reach effect image, the opening effect image, and the opening/closing effect image include a plurality of character effect images in which images of some or all of the plurality of characters prepared in advance are displayed. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbol. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variable display and the effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stopper that switches whether or not to pay out game balls. It also includes a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls being paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, when a dispensing error such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 132 occurs to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

The ball rental device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 stores data in a recording medium such as a card inserted into the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount set in advance and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to pay out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, but may be a coin-shaped or stick-shaped storage medium that includes an IC chip, for example. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls according to the amount of cash by inserting cash.

[Launching control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 moves the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 to the launch rail 321 by driving the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated. Let it feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22 and directs the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31 by driving the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation. and fire it. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 seconds) as a drive signal. As a result, in the game machine 10, one game ball is fired toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22. Thereby, the firing control IC 81 determines, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, that the greater the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, the higher the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball firing mechanism 32. Adjust the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the firing handle 22 includes a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily operate to stop the firing of the game ball. is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the firing handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the game ball firing mechanism 32 stops firing the game balls. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and gaming in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 is prevented. Furthermore, the player can stop the firing of the game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with his/her thumb or the like at any timing while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates +12V voltage for driving various sensors, drive units, etc., +5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12V or +5V to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, etc.

The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10, and a RAM erasure switch 91 that is operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is in the ON state.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as a charging means that is charged with electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Furthermore, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply is cut off, it inputs a power outage signal to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. I judge that. In addition, when the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 18. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 performs a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed during a power outage. Executes NMI interrupt processing, etc. Note that in this embodiment, descriptions of startup processing, NMI interrupt processing, etc. will be omitted, and main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 9 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. As shown in FIG. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing to determine the detection state of a sensor or switch connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, magnet sensor 35, radio wave sensor 36, etc. are determined. At this time, if the entry of a game ball into any of the entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores this information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4, and when these counter values reach the maximum value. If so, clear the corresponding counter value to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a start-up winning process associated with winning to the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005). The details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the firing control process is performed on the game ball on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process to enable the firing of . In addition, the firing control process disables the firing of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the firing handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. This is the process of The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 selects a through gate to randomly determine whether or not to put the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 into the electric role open state based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 412c. Execute processing. Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the current gaming mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency mode flag. When the MPU 41 is not in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal winning random number counter C4 is between 0 and 29, and when the normal winning random number counter C4 is between 30 and 249. It is determined that In addition, in the case of the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that a normal symbol is won when the normal winning random number counter C4 is between 0 and 199, and when the normal winning random number counter C4 is between 200 and 249, it is determined that the symbol is a winning symbol. It is determined that Then, when the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won in the through gate process, the electric accessory 315b is kept open for a predetermined period of time. This allows the game ball to enter the second operating port 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 on which the electric accessories 315b are arranged side by side.

<Step S1007>
In step S1007, the MPU 41 determines whether an error has occurred, and if an error has occurred, executes error processing to determine whether the error has been resolved. When an error occurs, the MPU 41 sets on the error occurrence flag stored in the RAM 412 according to the error type, and also sets an error occurrence command in the RAM 412. On the other hand, when the error is resolved, the MPU 41 sets an error flag corresponding to the resolved error type to OFF and sets an error resolution command in the RAM 412. The errors include, for example, a ball jamming error, a plate full error, a magnet detection error, a radio wave detection error, a vibration detection error, an abnormal prize winning error, and a door opening error. Ball jam errors, plate full errors, etc. are classified as normal errors, and magnet detection errors, radio wave detection errors, vibration detection errors, abnormal prize winning errors, door opening errors, etc. are classified as fraud detection errors. Moreover, a fraud detection error is positioned as an error that needs to be notified immediately after the error occurs, and a normal error is positioned as an error that does not need to be notified immediately after the error occurs.

[Start winning process]
Here, with reference to FIG. 10, the starting winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 9 will be described.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether a game ball has entered the first operating port 314 or not. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has entered the first operating port 314 (step S1101: Yes), it moves the process to step S1102, and determines that the game ball has not entered the first operating port 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process moves to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 in FIG. 9, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 in FIG. and S1310), and stores the count value in the first vacant reservation area among the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA of the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the validity information before the validity information for the first reservation acquired in step S1104 becomes a target for determining the validity of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 13, FIG. 15), which will be described later. This is confirmed, and a first pending command setting process is executed to set the first pending command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Note that details of the first pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 11.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 315 or not. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has entered the second operating port 315 (step S1106: Yes), it moves the process to step S1107, and determines that the game ball has not entered the second operating port 315. Then (step S1106: No), the start winning process is ended and the process moves to step S1005 in FIG. 9.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations M is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and moves the process to step S1005 in FIG. 9. On the other hand, if the number of reservations M is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 9, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 that is updated in the main process described below. Then, the counter value is stored in the first vacant reservation area among the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB of the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether the validity information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 is applicable to the determination of whether the jackpot is valid or not in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 13, FIG. 15), which will be described later. The contents are confirmed, and a second pending command setting process is executed to set the second pending command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, the second pending command setting process is similar to the first pending command setting process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 11, so detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that the second pending command setting process can be performed by replacing the "first pending command" with "second pending command" and the "number of pending commands N" with "number of pending commands M" in the first pending command setting process of FIG. good.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, the first pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in FIG. 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 11. The first pending command includes information indicating that the command is the first pending command, and information such as the type of the first pending command (jackpot type or loss), fluctuation pattern, and number of pending commands N. .

<Step S1201>
In step S1201, the MPU 41 reads the pending number N from the pending number storage area NAA of the first pending storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first pending from the RAM 412.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the mode is high probability mode or not. If it is the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process moves to step S1203, and if it is not the high probability mode (step S1202 :No), the process moves to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the high probability mode based on a high probability mode flag that can be set to ON in the gaming state transition process (step S1306 in the main process in FIG. 12), which will be described later. The high probability mode flag is set to ON by the MPU 41 when transitioning to the high probability mode, and is set to OFF when transitioning to the low probability mode.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning, based on the high probability mode win/fail table (see FIG. 8(B)). Execute the validity judgment. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning, based on the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 8(A)). Execute the validity judgment.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether the count value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the count value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win (step S1205: Yes), the process moves to step S1206, and the count value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the count value read from is not a value corresponding to a jackpot win (step S1205: No), the process moves to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the count values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the win/fail information is stored in the third pending storage area RE3 in step S1104 of FIG. 10, the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 included in the win/fail information stored in the third pending storage area RE3 The count value of is read out. Note that among the first reservation storage area RE1 to the fourth reservation storage area RE4, the reservation area in which the validity information is stored in step S1104 of FIG. 10 is determined based on the value of the reservation number N stored in the reservation number storage area NA. It is possible.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command. In this way, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which of the validity information stored in the first suspension storage area RE1 to the fourth suspension storage area RE4 the first suspension command corresponds to.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the count value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the pending number N to the first pending command (step S1209).

Note that the first pending command set to ON in the first pending command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. 12, which will be described later. It is deleted after being sent to the audio lamp control device 5 along with the command. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is only an example, and the contents are not limited to those described here as long as the audio lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 12. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of variable games and jackpot games are executed. In the main processing, the processing in steps S1301 to S1307 is executed as a regular processing at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter updating processing in steps S1308 to S1310 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing in steps S1301 to S1307 to the next cycle. Ru.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 outputs output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Execute processing. For example, commands such as a variable pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, a variable winning opening command, an error occurrence command, and an error resolution command are set in the RAM 412. If so, the command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5. Further, if a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the variation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a winning has occurred in the general winning hole 313, the variable winning hole 316, etc. based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with the winning is set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, when the MPU 41 determines that a winning has occurred in the variable winning opening 316 based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, it sets a variable winning opening winning command in the RAM 412. This variable winning opening winning command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 of the main processing. Thereby, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 can cause the symbol display section 341 to display the number of game balls paid out (balls paid out display) in the jackpot game.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the variable game control process will be described later, but in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and a variable pattern command necessary for the symbol display unit 341 to display a variable pattern is set. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 9, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which is updated in step S1302 and step S1310. Based on each value, a variable pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variable display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game. Although details of the jackpot game control process will be described later, in the jackpot game control process, by controlling the opening and closing of the opening/closing door 316b, a round game in which a game ball can enter the variable prize opening 316 can be played multiple times. Execute. This allows the player to acquire many game balls in the jackpot game.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the judgment result of the jackpot lottery in step S1604 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 15. In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 changes the game state when predetermined conditions are met to a jackpot game state with an opening/closing execution mode, a variable time-saving game state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, and a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode. A normal time-saving game state which is a support mode, a normal non-time-saving game state which is a low probability mode and is not a high frequency support mode, etc.

For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot game state after the end of the variable game for the jackpot, and executes the jackpot game having an open/close execution mode. At this time, the MPU 41 turns on the jackpot game start flag stored in the RAM 412. On the other hand, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game has ended based on whether or not the jackpot game end flag that is set to on in step S1722 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 16, which will be described later, is on. When it is determined that the jackpot game has ended, the gaming state is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state.

Specifically, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, or the 5R normal jackpot flag, which is set to ON in step S1607, S1608, or S1609 in the variation start process of FIG. 15, which will be described later, is turned on at the end of the variable game for the jackpot. In this case, by setting the jackpot game start flag to ON, the gaming state after the end of the variable game for the jackpot is shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 changes the game state from the jackpot game state to a predetermined game based on which of the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON. transition to the state. For example, when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the probability variable jackpot gaming state to the probability variable time-saving gaming state. Further, when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the normal time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the gaming state is shifted, the MPU 41 sets the gaming state flag for the gaming state after the shift to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high probability mode flag to ON when the gaming state is shifted to the variable time saving gaming state, and sets the time saving mode flag to ON when the gaming state is shifted to the normal time saving gaming state. do. Moreover, when the time saving mode flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 sets a preset number of time saving times (50 times, 100 times, etc.) as the number of executions of the variable game in the time saving mode in the time saving counter. On the other hand, when the gaming state is transferred from the jackpot gaming state to another gaming state, the MPU 41 selects the jackpot flag that is set to on among the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 5R normal jackpot flag. Set to off.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the main display section 37. Through this display control processing, the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 in the main display section 37 execute a symbol variation display only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is a symbol indicating the lottery result. It will be displayed as stopped. In addition, by display control processing, each LED lamp in the LED pair 371 in the main display section 37 flashes only during a predetermined normal symbol fluctuation display time, and the presence or absence of a winning normal symbol is indicated by lighting and extinguishing of the pair of LED lamps. This is indicated by a lighting pattern that is a combination of . In addition, in the case of a normal symbol winning, the electric accessory 315b attached to the second operating port 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 determines whether the execution timing for the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the timing to execute the next main process has arrived (step S1308: Yes), the process moves to step S1301, and executes each process from S1301 described above. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the next main processing execution timing has not arrived (step S1308: No), the MPU 41 determines that the next main processing execution timing has not arrived, that is, until the next main processing execution timing arrives. During the remaining time, steps S1308, S1309, and S1310 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived (step S1308: Yes).

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter values of the variation type counter CS1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1308.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 13, the variable game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. 12 will be described.

<Step S1401>
In step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is playing a jackpot game, and if it is playing a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), it ends the variable game control process and stops playing a jackpot game. If so (step S1401: No), the process moves to step S1402. For example, whether or not a jackpot game is to be executed is determined based on a jackpot game execution flag that the MPU 41 sets to ON at the start of the jackpot game and to OFF at the end of the jackpot game. Further, when the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and transmits this jackpot game start command to the audio lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF at the end of the jackpot game, it sets a jackpot game end command in the RAM 412 and transmits this jackpot game end command to the audio lamp control device 5.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1402: Yes), the process moves to step S1403, and if the symbol variation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1403. (Step S1402: No), the process moves to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol fluctuation display is in progress is set to ON in step S1614 in the fluctuation start process in FIG. 15, which will be described later, and when the fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), The determination is made based on the variable display flag that is set to OFF in step S1405.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display, and if it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process moves to step S1404. However, if it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variable game control process is ended.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the 7-segment displays 372, 373 of the main display section 37 to stop displaying the symbols according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game ( Step S1404), and the variable display flag is set to OFF (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If the symbol variation is not being displayed (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 stores the number of reservations N stored in the number of reservations storage area NAA of the reservation storage area 412b and the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB. It is determined whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process. On the other hand, if either the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the validity information data stored in the pending storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 finishes the process of step S1407, the process moves to step S1408. Note that details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display section 341 to execute a variable display based on the validity information stored in the execution area AE, and ends the variable game control process. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 15.

[Data setting processing]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 14.

<Step S1501>
In step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether the pending number M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0 or not, and if the pending number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process moves to step S1502. do. On the other hand, if the number of reservations M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
If the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reservations N stored in the reservation number storage area NAA (step S1502), and transfers the data from the first reservation area REA1 to the execution area AE. The validity information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the validity information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the validity information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved. The validity information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 moves on when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 moves on when both or one of the number of reservations M and the number of reservations N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: Yes). Therefore, when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number of reservations N is not 0, and therefore executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the validity information from the first pending area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the validity information of the fourth reservation area REB4 is moved. The validity information is moved to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S1507 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508 and Step S1509>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time-saving mode flag, which is set to on in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 12, is set to on, and sets the time-saving mode flag to on. If so (step S1508: Yes), the counter value of the time saving counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1509). On the other hand, if the time saving mode flag is set to OFF (step S1508: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1512.

<Steps S1510 and S1511>
In step S1510, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S1510). Here, when the counter value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S1510: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time saving mode flag to OFF (step S1511), and moves the process to step S1512. If the value of the time saving counter is not 0 (step S1510: No), the process moves to step S1512 without setting the time saving mode flag to OFF.

<Step S1512>
In step S1512, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the validity information of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1512 is then transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 12) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of pending symbols displayed on the symbol display section 341 is changed. When the process in step S1512 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and moves the process to step S1408 in FIG. 13.

[Variation start processing]
Here, an example of the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 15.

<Step S1601>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag, which is set to on in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 12, is set to on (step S1601), and determines whether the high probability mode flag is on. If the high probability mode flag is set to OFF (step S1601: Yes), the process moves to step S1602, and if the high probability mode flag is set to OFF (step S1601: No), the process moves to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
If the high probability mode flag is set to on (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the high probability mode is valid or not based on the validity information currently stored in the execution area AE, based on the high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 8(B)). A judgment is made as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win (step S1602). On the other hand, if the high probability mode flag is set to OFF (step S1601: No), the MPU 41 selects the information currently stored in the execution area AE based on the low probability mode validity table (see FIG. 8(A)). A determination is made as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the win/fail information is a value corresponding to a jackpot win (step S1603).

<Steps S1604 to S1610>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a jackpot. If the result of the determination is a jackpot (step S1604: Yes), the type of jackpot is determined (steps S1605 and S1606). Specifically, based on the jackpot type counter C2 included in the win/fail information currently stored in the execution area AE and the distribution table (see FIG. 8(C)), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot type is 5R certain variable jackpot or not. (Step S1605), and it is determined whether it is a 16R probability variable jackpot (Step S1606).

When the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot (step S1605: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON (step S1607). The 5R probability variable jackpot flag indicates whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the win/fail information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 5R probability variable jackpot. Further, in step S1607, the stop result of the main display section 37 in the variable game where the jackpot lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot is also set based on the win/fail information. Note that the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is set to OFF at the end of the variation start process. Moreover, when the process of step S1607 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1611.

When the jackpot type is a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to ON (step S1608). The 16R probability variable jackpot flag indicates whether the result of the jackpot lottery based on the win/fail information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 16R probability variable jackpot. Further, in step S1608, the stop result of the main display section 37 in the variable game where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot is also set based on the win/fail information. Note that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to OFF at the end of the variation start process. Moreover, when the process of step S1608 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1611.

When the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: No), the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag provided in the RAM 412 to ON (step S1609). The 5R normal jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery based on the win/fail information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 5R normal jackpot. Further, in step S1609, the stop result of the main display section 37 in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot is also set based on the win/fail information. Note that when the process in step S1609 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1611.

Note that the MPU 41 can determine the type of jackpot based on the jackpot flag set to ON in any of steps S1607 to S1609, and can also determine the number of round games (number of rounds) to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode. can be judged.

On the other hand, if the result of the success/failure determination is not a jackpot (step S1604: No), the MPU 41 sets the losing flag to ON (step S1610). The loss flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery based on the win/fail information currently stored in the execution area AE is a loss. Further, in step S1610, the stop result of the main display section 37 in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss is also set based on the win/fail information. Note that the deviation flag is set to OFF at the end of the fluctuation start process. Moreover, when the process of step S1610 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1611.

<Step S1611>
In step S1611, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the 7 segment displays 372, 373 of the main display section 37 corresponding to the variable pattern of the variable game in the variable display time counter. Specifically, when the normal jackpot flag is set to on, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 8(E)). Furthermore, when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 8(F)). Furthermore, when the deviation flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the deviation variation table (see FIG. 8(G)).

<Step S1612>
In step S1612, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a variable pattern command including the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game and the variable pattern specified in step S1611. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 12) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5, and the audio lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The unit 341 executes symbol variation display and the like.

As mentioned above, when the lottery result is a "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 selects variable patterns "01" to "03" with an "A" indicating a 5R normal jackpot, "A01" to "A01" to "03". A03'' is set in the RAM 412 as a variable pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is a "5R certain strange jackpot", the MPU 41 selects one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" with "B" attached to indicate a 5R certain strange jackpot, "B01" to "B03". is set in the RAM 412 as a variable pattern command. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R definite strange jackpot", the MPU 41 selects one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" with a "C" indicating a 16R sure strange jackpot, "C01" to "C03". is set in the RAM 412 as a variable pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 41 selects one of "D01" to "D08" as a variation pattern with "D" attached to the variation patterns "01" to "08" to indicate a "lost" lottery result. It is set in the RAM 412 as a command. In addition, when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 41 includes information on whether the lottery result is "out of reach", "out of reach", or "out of reach" in the variation pattern command.

<Steps S1613 and S1614>
The MPU 41 starts the fluctuating symbol display on the main display section 37 (step S1613), and sets the fluctuating display flag to ON (step S1614). The symbol variation display started here stops in the state of the stop result set in any of steps S1607 to S1610 after the variation display time set in step S1611 has elapsed.

<Steps S1615 and S1616>
In step S1615, the MPU 41 determines whether the out-of-line flag is set to on. If the deviation flag is set to ON (step S1615: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the deviation flag to OFF (step S1616), and ends the fluctuation start process. On the other hand, if the deviation flag is set to OFF (step S1615: No), the MPU 41 ends the fluctuation start process.

In addition, in the fluctuation start process, the jackpot flags that are set to on in steps S1607 to S1609 are not set to OFF, and these jackpot flags are used in the jackpot game control process (step S1305) in the main process of FIG. is referenced in , and is set to OFF when the number of round games R corresponding to the jackpot type is set in step S1703 in this jackpot game control process.

[Jackpot game control processing]
Here, an example of the jackpot game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1305 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG. 16. In the jackpot game control process, control is executed to execute a round game in which a game ball can enter the variable winning hole 316 a plurality of times. Further, FIG. 17(A) is a time chart showing an example of a 5R jackpot game, and FIG. 17(B) is a time chart showing an example of a 16R jackpot game. Below, an example of the 5R jackpot game and the 16R jackpot game will be explained with reference to FIGS. 17(A) and 17(B), and then the jackpot game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 16.

As shown in FIGS. 17(A) and 17(B), the 5R jackpot game and the 16R jackpot game consist of an opening, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending.

The opening is a period from transition to the jackpot gaming state until the opening/closing execution mode is started. In addition, at the opening, in the symbol display section 341, for example, the type of jackpot (number of rounds, variable probability or not) is suggested or specified, and the number of consecutive hits is displayed, and the method of operating the firing handle 22 in the jackpot game is shown. is instructed.

In the opening/closing execution mode, round games are executed the number of times according to the type of jackpot. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17(A), a 5R jackpot game in which a round game is executed five times in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot and a 5R normal jackpot is played, and as shown in FIG. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, a 16R jackpot game in which a round game is executed 16 times is played.

Here, the round game is a game in which the variable winning hole 316 is opened. In the round game, the variable winning hole 316 is closed when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) passes or when a predetermined number or more (for example, 9 or more) of game balls enter the variable winning hole 316. Further, in this embodiment, an interval (for example, 1.5 seconds) is provided between the round games in the opening/closing execution mode in which the closed state of the variable winning hole 316 is maintained for a predetermined period of time. That is, the opening/closing execution mode is executed in the order of round game → interval → round game → interval → round game . . . → round game. However, it is not necessary to set the interval in the opening/closing execution mode. For example, the interval may be substantially eliminated by immediately opening the variable winning opening 316 immediately after closing the variable winning opening 316, or a plurality of variable winning openings 316 may be provided and these variable winning openings 316 may be opened alternately. The interval may be substantially eliminated by opening it to .

The ending is a period from the end of the opening/closing execution mode until the end of the jackpot game. At the ending, the symbol display section 341 suggests or clearly indicates the game state to which the game will be transferred after the end of the jackpot game. However, in this embodiment, in the ending, the game state to which the jackpot game will be transferred after the end of the jackpot game is not suggested, and the game state to which the game state will be transferred, that is, the variable time-saving game state, which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the low probability It is clearly indicated which mode to shift to, the normal time saving gaming state which is the high frequency support mode. In addition, at the ending, information regarding the balls that are put out, such as the number of successive jackpots, the number of balls played in the jackpot game, and the total number of balls played during the jackpot game, is also generally displayed in the symbol display section 341 at the ending.

<Step S1701>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 16, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game start flag, which is set to on in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. Decide whether to start. If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1702, and if the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1702. The process moves to step S1706.

<Step S1702>
When starting the jackpot game (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 (step S1702). This jackpot game start command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the jackpot game effect to be executed by the symbol display section 341 and the speaker 26 (step S2707 in FIG. 30, FIG. 33), and can start the jackpot game effect (step S2707 in FIG. 44). Steps S3201 to S3206).

<Step S1703>
In step S1703, the MPU 41 sets the number of round games R to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot flag that is set to ON in any of steps S1607 to S1609 in the variation start process of FIG. For example, when the jackpot flag is the 5R variable jackpot flag (step S1607 in FIG. 15) or the 5R normal jackpot flag (step S1609 in FIG. 15), the MPU 41 stores the round game number R as "5" in the RAM 412. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is the 16R probability variable jackpot flag (step S1608 in FIG. 15), the MPU 41 stores the round game number R as "16" in the RAM 412. As a result, the MPU 41 executes round games of the number R of round games according to the jackpot type in the opening/closing execution mode control process of step S1714, which will be described later. In addition, when the MPU 41 sets the number of round games R in the opening/closing execution mode, it sets the jackpot flag that was set on to off.

<Step S1704 and Step S1705>
In step S1704, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot start flag to OFF, and further sets the opening flag to ON (Step S1705). The opening flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1706, which will be described later, and the MPU 41 determines the timing to start the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening flag.

<Step S1706>
In step S1706, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening flag set to on in step S1705 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening has started. If the opening flag is set to on (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1707, and if the opening flag is set to off (step S1706: Yes), the process moves to step S1713. Transition.

<Step S1707>
If the opening flag is set to on (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time is being counted, which will be started in step S1708, which will be described later, when starting the opening. (Step S1707). If the opening time is being counted (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1709, and if the opening time is not being measured (step S1707: No), the process moves to step S1708.

<Step S1708>
In step S1708, the MPU 41 starts counting the opening time after starting the opening, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening time measured in step S1708 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether to end the opening and shift to the opening/closing execution mode in step S1709, which will be described later.

<Step S1709>
In step S1709, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening time for which time measurement is started in step S1708 has reached a predetermined time period necessary for executing the opening. If the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S1709: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1710, and if the opening time has not reached the predetermined time (step S1709: No), the MPU 41 executes the jackpot game control process. end.

<Steps S1710 to S1712>
When the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S1709: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening flag to OFF (step S1710), ends the timing of the opening time (step S1711), and sets the opening/closing execution mode flag. It is set to on (step S1712). Thereby, the MPU 41 can end the opening and shift to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1713, which will be described later, and the MPU 41 executes opening/closing execution processing (step S1714), which will be described later, when the opening/closing execution mode flag is set to on.

<Step S1713>
In step S1713, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening/closing execution mode flag set to on in step S1712 is set to on. If the opening/closing execution mode flag is set to ON (step S1713: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1714, and if the opening/closing execution mode flag is set to OFF (step S1713: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1714. The process moves to step S1715.

<Step S1714>
In step S1714, the MPU 41 executes opening/closing execution mode control processing. In the opening/closing execution mode control process, the MPU 41 executes the round game in which the variable winning hole 316 is opened a plurality of times depending on the jackpot type. Note that details of the opening/closing execution mode control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 18.

<Step S1715>
In step S1715, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending flag, which is set to on in step S1809 in the opening/closing execution mode control process of FIG. 18, which will be described later, is set to on. If the ending flag is set to ON (step S1715: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1716, and if the ending flag is set to OFF (step S1715: No), the MPU 41 executes the jackpot game control process. end.

<Step S1716>
When the ending flag is set to on (step S1715: Yes), when starting the ending, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time is being counted, which will be started in step S1717, which will be described later. (Step S1716). If the ending time is being counted (step S1716: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1719, and if the ending time is not being measured (step S1716: No), the process moves to step S1717.

<Steps S1717 and S1718>
In step S1717, the MPU 41 starts counting the ending time after starting the ending, further sets an ending start command in the RAM 412 (step S1718), and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time measured in step S1717 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether to end the ending (jackpot game) in step S1719, which will be described later.

<Step S1719>
In step S1719, the MPU 41 determines whether the ending time for which time measurement is started in step S1717 has reached a predetermined time period necessary for executing the ending. If the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S1719: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1720, and if the ending time has not reached the predetermined time (step S1719: No), the MPU 41 executes the jackpot game control process. end.

<Steps S1720 to S1722>
If the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S1719: Yes), the MPU 41 sets off the ending flag that is set to on in step S1809 in the opening/closing execution mode control process in FIG. 18, which will be described later. S1720), ends the counting of the ending time (step S1721), and sets the jackpot game end flag to ON (step S1722). Thereby, the MPU 41 can end the ending, that is, the jackpot game. The jackpot end flag is referenced by the MPU 41 in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. is transferred from the jackpot gaming state to another gaming state (in this embodiment, to the probability variable time-saving gaming state or the normal time-saving gaming state).

<Step S1723>
In step S1723, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot end command in the RAM 412, and ends the jackpot game control process. The jackpot end command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the jackpot game performance on the symbol display section 341 and the speaker 26 (see steps S2715 and S2716 in FIG. 30 and steps S3215 to S3217 in FIG. 44).

[Opening/closing execution mode control processing]
Here, an example of the opening/closing execution mode control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1714 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIG. 18. In the opening/closing execution mode control process, the round game in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened as described above is executed a plurality of times depending on the jackpot type.

<Step S1801>
In step S1801, the MPU 41 determines whether the variable prize opening opening flag that is set to on in step S1804 of the opening/closing execution mode control process is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning hole 316 is open. If the variable winning opening opening flag is set to ON (step S1801: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1802, and if the variable winning opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S1801: No). , the process moves to step S1810.

<Step S1802>
In step S1802, the MPU 41 determines whether the conditions for closing the variable winning hole 316 are satisfied. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the variable winning hole 316 was opened, or whether the number of game balls entered into the variable winning hole 316 has exceeded a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). Decide whether or not. If the conditions for closing the variable winning hole 316 are satisfied (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1803, and if the conditions for closing the variable winning hole 316 are not satisfied. (Step S1802: No), the opening/closing execution mode control process ends.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
If the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316 are satisfied (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316 (step S1803), and further sets the variable winning opening opening flag to OFF ( Step S1804).

<Steps S1805 and S1806>
In step S1805, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number R of round games stored in the RAM 412, and then determines whether the number R of round games after the subtraction is "0" (step S1806). If the number R of round games after subtraction is "0" (step S1805: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1808, and if the number R of round games after subtraction is not "0" (step S1806: No). ), the process moves to step S1807.

<Step S1807>
If the round game number R after the subtraction is not "0" (step S1806: No), the MPU 41 starts counting the interval time until the next round game is executed (step S1807), and executes the opening/closing execution mode control process. end. The interval time at which time counting is started in step S1807 is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1810, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to open the variable winning hole 316.

<Steps S1808 and S1809>
If the number of round games R after the subtraction is "0" (step S1805: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag to OFF (step S1808), and further sets the ending flag to ON (step S1809). , the opening/closing execution mode control process ends. This ending flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1715 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 16 to determine whether to start the ending.

<Step S1810>
If the variable prize opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the interval time at which timing is started in step S1807 has exceeded a predetermined time, that is, the interval has ended. Then, it is determined whether or not to start a round game (step S1810). If the interval time exceeds the predetermined time (step S1810: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1811, and if the interval time does not exceed the predetermined time (step S1810: No), the MPU 41 executes the opening/closing execution mode control process. end.

<Steps S1811 to S1813>
If the interval time exceeds the predetermined time (step S1810: Yes), the MPU 41 opens the variable winning hole 316 (step S1811), and turns on the variable winning hole opening flag indicating whether the variable winning hole 316 is open. settings (step S1812). The variable winning opening opening flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1801 described above. At this time, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command in the RAM 412 (step S1813), and ends the opening/closing execution mode control process. This round game start command is for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of starting a round game (opening the variable winning hole 316) and which round the round game is. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 46.

Note that in another embodiment, part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In addition, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27, startup processing at the time of startup of the audio lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power outage, etc. Descriptions of those processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51. The MPU 51 executes, for example, a sub-timer interrupt process as a regular process with a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 performs operation button operation detection processing (step S1901), operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1902), selection button operation detection processing (step S1903), selection operation detection Pattern determination processing (step S1904), determination button operation detection processing (step S1905), determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1906), counter update processing (step S1907), game setting processing (step S1908), command determination processing (step S1909), error processing (step S1910), variable game performance processing (step S1911), and jackpot game performance processing (step S1912) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection processing]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process (step S1901) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 19. In the operation detection process, the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the history of the past three operations is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the MPU 51 executes the operation button operation detection process, so that the operation button 20 is operated at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It will be determined whether or not there is.

<Steps S2001 to S2003>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S2001, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. Furthermore, in step S2002, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Thereafter, in step S2003, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

In this way, in the operation button operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2001 to S2003, the operation status of the most recent three times at an interval of 1 msec is set as the operation history of the operation button 20 in the first detection flag to the third detection flag. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the two previous operation state is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination processing]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process (step S1902) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 19. In the operation detection pattern determination process, an operation pattern is determined for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. Set flag. The operation pattern flags consist of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by the combination of on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 22(A), if only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is being continued. Furthermore, if only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has started. Furthermore, if only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has ended. If all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to on. Here, if the first operation detection flag is on (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2102, and if the first operation detection flag is off (step S2101: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2102. The process moves to step S2105.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to on. Here, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2103 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2102: Yes), and moves the process to step S2103 when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2102: No). The process moves to step S2108.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is set to on. Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S2103: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2104, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S2103: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2104. The process moves to step S2110.

<Step S2104>
In step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 can determine that the operating state of the operating button 20 is continuing when the operating pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operating state of the operating button 20 three times. , sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 22(A)). The first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 continues to be operated.

<Step S2105>
When the MPU 51 determines that the first operation detection flag is off in step S2101 (step S2101: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. is determined (step S2105). Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S2105: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2106, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S2105: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2106. The process moves to step S2110.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on. Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2107, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S2106: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2107. The process moves to step S2110.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 determines that when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the operation button 20 changes from the non-operation state to the operation state (operation state). has started), the second operation pattern flag is set on, and the first and third operation pattern flags are set off (see FIG. 22(A)). The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times will be reflected, so the radio wave Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2108>
If the MPU 51 determines that the second operation detection flag is off in step S2102 (step S2102: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. (Step S2108). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2110, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S2108: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2110. The process moves to step S2109.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 changes from the operation state to the non-operation state (operation state). The third operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first and second operation pattern flags are set to OFF (see FIG. 22(A)). The third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). In this way, if it is determined whether the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 three times will be reflected, so the radio wave Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the end of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing unintended by the player.

<Step S2110>
In step S2110, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (see FIG. 22(A)). Note that, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operation state.

[Selection button operation detection processing]
In the selection button operation detection process (step S1903 in FIG. 19), the MPU 51 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Upper selection button operation process>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, since the upper selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 20, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the upper selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "upper selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

<Down selection button operation process>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the lower selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 20, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

<Left selection button operation process>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the left selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 20, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the left selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

<Right selection button operation process>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the right selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 20, so detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S1904 in FIG. 19), the MPU 51 performs an up selection operation detection pattern determination process, a down selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process. Execute.

<Up selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects an upper selection operation from the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. An up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, since the upward selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 21, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the upward selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 22(B), in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the upper selection button 211 for three times. If this occurs, it can be determined that the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continuing, so the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to ON. Set to off. The first upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 continues.

In addition, the MPU 51 determines whether the upper selection button 211 changes from a non-operated state to an operated state when an operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. Since it can be determined that (the operation has started), the second upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has started). used.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 determines whether the upper selection button 211 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state when an operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operating state of the upper selection button 211 three times. Since it can be determined that (the operation has ended), the third upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 51 flags the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in a non-operated state.

<Down selection operation detection pattern judgment process>
In the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects the down selection button from the operation history of the down selection button 212 determined based on the first down selection operation detection flag, the second down selection operation detection flag, and the down selection operation detection flag. A down operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 212 is set. Here, the down selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 21, so detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process shown in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 22(C), in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the down selection button 212 for three times. If this occurs, it can be determined that the operation state of the lower selection button 212 is continuing, so the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to ON. Set to off. The first lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 continues to be operated.

In addition, the MPU 51 determines whether the lower selection button 212 changes from a non-operated state to an operated state when an operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the three operation states of the lower selection button 212. Since it can be determined that (the operation has started), the second lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has started). used.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 determines whether the lower selection button 212 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state when an operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operating state of the lower selection button 212 three times. Since it can be determined that (the operation has ended), the third lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 51 flags the first to third lower selection operation detection flags. Set all of them to off. Note that when all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in the non-operated state.

<Left selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects a left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 21, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 22(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the left selection button 213 for three times. If this occurs, it can be determined that the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing, so the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to ON. Set to off. The first left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 continues.

In addition, the MPU 51 determines whether the left selection button 213 changes from a non-operated state to an operated state when an operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the three operation states of the left selection button 213. Since it can be determined that (the operation has started), the second left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has started). used.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 determines whether the left selection button 213 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state when an operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operating state of the left selection button 213 three times. Since it can be determined that the operation has ended, the third left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 51 flags the first to third left selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operated state.

<Right selection operation detection pattern judgment process>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 214 is set. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 21, so detailed explanation will be omitted. In addition, in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 22(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the three operation states of the right selection button 214. If this occurs, it can be determined that the operating state of the right selection button 214 is continuing, so the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to ON. Set to off. The first right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 continues.

In addition, the MPU 51 determines whether the right selection button 214 changes from a non-operated state to an operated state when an operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the three operation states of the right selection button 214. Since it can be determined that (the operation has started), the second right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has started). used.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 determines whether the right selection button 214 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state when an operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operating state of the right selection button 214 three times. Since it can be determined that the operation has ended, the third right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 51 flags the first to third right selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operated state.

[Enter button operation detection processing]
In the determination button operation detection process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three operations. Here, since the decision button operation detection process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 20, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the determination button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "determination button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

[Decision operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the decision operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the operation state of the decision button 21B from the operation history of the decision button 21B, which is determined based on the first decision operation detection flag, the second decision operation detection flag, and the third decision operation detection flag. Set the operation pattern flag to determine the Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 21, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "determination operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22(F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" have occurred as the operation states of the determination button 21B three times. In this case, it can be determined that the operation state of the decision button 21B continues, so the first decision operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B continues.

In addition, the MPU 51 determines that when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the three operation states of the decision button 21B, the decision button 21B changes from the non-operated state to the operated state (operated state). Since it can be determined that the second determination operation pattern flag has been started, the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B has changed from a non-operating state to an operating state (whether or not the decision button 21B has started operating). .

Furthermore, the MPU 51 determines that when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the determination button 21B three times, the determination button 21B changes from the operation state to the non-operation state (operation Since it can be determined that the third determination operation pattern flag has been completed, the third determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first determination operation pattern flag and the second determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B has ended). .

Furthermore, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc. occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times, the MPU 51 controls all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags. Set to off. Note that, when all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B is in a non-operated state.

[Counter update processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 19, in the counter update process (step S1907), the MPU 51 updates the production type counter, the variable display counter, and the scenario type counter. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the performance type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The production type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and production type based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to know the remaining variable display time, that the variable display is in progress, that the variable display of the symbol display section 341 has ended, etc. In this embodiment, for example, the variable display counter indicates whether the variable display of the main symbol has started in the symbol display section 341 in step S2301 of FIG. 26, step S2401 of FIG. 27, step S2501 of FIG. 28, or step S2601 of FIG. Reference is made when determining whether Furthermore, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the scenario type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The scenario type counter updated here is used to determine the performance scenario type of the opening/closing execution mode performance in the jackpot game performance (see step S2805 in FIG. 33). For example, the scenario type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 199.

[Game setting processing]
Here, FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting process (step S1908 in FIG. 19). In the game setting process, during a period in which variable game performances and jackpot game performances are not executed, a jackpot is set according to the player's operation on the selection determination section 21 (the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and determination button 21B). Performs game settings for game performances and variable game performances. In this embodiment, as a game setting, a character setting for selecting a character from a plurality of characters (selection subject) in a variable game performance will be described. Hereinafter, the character selected by the character settings will be referred to as a "selected character" (specific selection subject). The selected character image (selection main image) 714 for this selected character is a variable game effect and a variable stop state (a variable stop screen described later), except when a specific effect including a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed. 72 (see FIG. 25(A))), it is displayed in a partial area (eg, lower right corner, lower left corner, lower part, etc.) of the symbol display section 341. In addition, the selected character image 714 is displayed with priority over other characters in a predetermined performance (for example, cut-in performance, step-up performance, mini character performance), or has a higher lottery result in a jackpot lottery than other characters. It is also conceivable that the display may be displayed as an effect with high expectations that it will be a jackpot.

Before explaining the game setting process shown in FIG. 23, an example of transition of the display screen in the game setting process will be described first with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. In addition, in the following explanation, for the sake of simplicity, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the stop display of the main symbol 715, the screen will not shift to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(B)), demo screen, or power saving screen, which will be described later. The description will be made on the assumption that a fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25(A)), which will be described later, is maintained and game settings become possible after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation stop screen 71 is displayed. Of course, the game settings may be enabled immediately after the fluctuation stop screen 71 is displayed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop screen 71 is displayed, the game settings can be automatically set without depending on the player's operation. The display screen may shift from the fluctuation stop screen 71 to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(B)).

As shown in FIG. 24, the display screen shifts to at least a fluctuation stop screen 71, a top menu screen 72, a game setting screen 73, and a character selection screen 74 in response to the player's operation on the selection determining unit 21, and the first operation When a game ball enters the opening 314 or the second operation opening 315, the screen shifts to a variable display screen 75 on which a main symbol 715 is displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25(A), the fluctuation stop screen 71 shows that when the fluctuation display of the main symbol 715 is stopped, the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M are "0", and the jackpot game state is reached. This is a screen in which the main symbol 715 remains in a stopped state if it does not shift. In this embodiment, the selected character image 714 is displayed in the lower right corner of the fluctuation stop screen 71. Further, the fluctuation stop screen 71 also transitions when the player selects "End" on the top menu screen 72, game setting screen 73, or character selection screen 74.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25(B), the top menu screen 72 is a screen that is transitioned from any of the fluctuation stop screen 71, the game setting screen 73, and the character selection screen 74. Specifically, on the top menu screen 72, for example, if the player operates the operation button 20 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation stop screen 71 is displayed, the player can select "Go back by one" on the game setting screen 73. is selected, and when the player selects "Return to Top Menu" on the character selection screen 74. Note that the display screen may be configured to shift from the fluctuation stop screen 71 to the top menu screen 72 when an operation section other than the operation button 20, such as the determination button 21B of the selection determination section 21, is operated.

Here, as shown in FIG. 25(B), the top menu screen 72 includes a plurality of selection images 721 to 725, a cursor image 726, and a selection determination part image 727.

The plurality of selection images 721 to 725 are images that show a plurality of selectable items and allow the player to select a desired item from among the plurality of items. Further, the plurality of selection images 721 to 725 are also images for selecting a display screen to which to move. The plurality of selection images 721 to 725 include a selection image 723 of "gaming settings customization", a selection image 725 of "end", and the like. The selection image 723 for "Customize game settings" is for transitioning from the top menu screen 72 to the game settings screen 73 (see FIG. 25(C)) for making game settings for variable games and jackpot games (see FIG. 25(C)). 24). The "end" selection image 725 is for transitioning the display screen from the top menu screen 72 to the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25(A)) (see FIG. 24).

The cursor image 726 is an image indicating the temporarily selected item. In addition, in order to emphasize that the temporarily selected selection image (in FIG. 25(B), the selection image 723 of "gaming settings customization") has been temporarily selected, other selection images 721, 722, 724, 725 in a distinguishable manner.

The selection determining unit image 727 is an image imitating the selection determining unit 21 (see FIG. 1), and is an image showing that a desired item can be selected from a plurality of items by operating the selection determining unit 21. In the selection determination part image 727, the words "select" are attached to the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, and the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are highlighted. is displayed. Furthermore, the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 may be highlighted by blinking display or the like. In addition, in the selection decision section image 727, the word "decide" is added to the image corresponding to the decision button 21B, indicating that the decision button 21B should be operated when selecting the tentatively selected item. The display example of the selection determination part image 727 is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 25(B), and can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25(C), the game setting screen 73 is a screen transitioned from the top menu screen 72 or the character selection screen 74. Specifically, the game setting screen 73 is moved when the player selects "Customize game settings" on the top menu screen 72, and when the player selects "Go back one step" on the character selection screen 74. do.

Here, as shown in FIG. 25(C), the game setting screen 73 includes a plurality of selection images 731 to 735, a cursor image 726, and a selection determination part image 727. Note that the cursor image 726 and the selection decision section image 727 are the same as those on the top menu screen 72, so their explanation will be omitted. In the following description, if it is the same as the cursor image 726 and the selection determination part image 727 of the top menu screen 72, the same reference numerals will be given and the description will be omitted. The plurality of selection images 731 to 735 are images that indicate a plurality of selectable items (transition destination display screen) and allow the player to select a desired item from among the plurality of items. The plurality of selection images 731 to 735 include a selection image 733 for "character selection", a selection image 734 for "go back one step", and a selection image 735 for "end".

The selection image 733 of "Character selection" is a character selection screen 74 (FIG. 25 (D)) for selecting the selected character image 714 (see FIG. 25 (A)) in the variable game performance from the game setting screen 73 on the display screen. ) (see FIG. 24). The selection image 734 for "Go back one step" is used to shift the display screen from the game setting screen 73 to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(B)) (see FIG. 24). The "end" selection image 735 is for moving the display screen from the game setting screen 73 to the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25(A)) (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25(D), the character selection screen 74 is a screen transitioned from the game setting screen 73. Specifically, the game setting screen 73 is moved when "character selection" is selected by the player on the game setting screen 73.

Here, as shown in FIG. 25(D), the character selection screen 74 includes a plurality of selection images 741 to 748, a temporary selection frame image 749, and a selection determination part image 727. The plurality of selection images 741 to 748 include a plurality of character selection images 741 to 745, a selection image 746 for “Go back one step”, a selection image 747 for “Return to top menu”, and a selection image 748 for “End”.

The plurality of character selection images 741 to 745 are images that allow the player to select a selected character to be displayed as the selected character image 714 (see FIG. 25(A)). In this embodiment, 20 characters (Character 1 to Character 20) are prepared for variable game performance and jackpot game performance, and 9 of them (Character 1 to Character 9) are selected by the player. can be displayed as a selected character image 714 (see FIG. 25(A)). Of course, the selected character to be displayed as the selected character image 714 (see FIG. 25(A)) may be selected from among all the characters prepared for the variable game performance and the jackpot game performance.

Furthermore, on the character selection screen 74, five characters out of nine selectable characters are displayed simultaneously, and the character placed in the center is displayed the largest, and the further away from the center the characters are displayed smaller. . These five characters are changed by scrolling characters 1 to 9 left and right by operating the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214. Of course, the number of characters displayed at the same time on the character selection screen 74 is not limited to five, but may be any number as long as it is one or more, and all selectable characters may be displayed at the same time. Furthermore, when displaying a plurality of characters simultaneously on the character selection screen 74, all the characters may be displayed in the same size.

The temporary selection frame image 749 is an image indicating that the character is selectable by operating the determination button 21B, and is displayed so as to surround the character selection image. In FIG. 25(D), character 1 displayed in the center is the temporarily selected character. Note that the display position of the temporarily selected frame image 749 is fixed, and the position will not be changed even if the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 is operated. In addition, when displaying a plurality of characters at the same time in the same size on the character selection screen 74, the temporarily selected frame image 749 may be moved by operating the selection button 213, right selection button 214, or the like.

The selection image 746 for "Go back one step" is used to shift the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25(C)) (see FIG. 24). The "return to top menu" selection image 747 is used to shift the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(B)) (see FIG. 24). The "end" selection image 748 is for transitioning the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the variation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25(A)) (see FIG. 24).

<Step S2201>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 23, in step S2201 in the game setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25(A)). Specifically, the MPU 51 is set to ON when the value of the variable display counter updated in the counter update process of step S1907 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 19 is 0, and also in the case of FIG. Variable stop screen display that is set to ON in step S2407 in the top menu screen process, step S2511 in the game setting screen process in FIG. 28 (described later), or variable stop screen transition process in step S2612 in the character selection screen process in FIG. 29 (described later). It is determined whether the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 71 depending on whether the flag is on or not.

When the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 71 (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2202, and when the display screen is not the fluctuation stop screen 92 (step S2201: No), the process moves to step S2203. do.

<Step S2202>
In step S2202, the MPU 51 executes a game start standby process and ends the game setting process. The details of the game start standby process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

<Step S2203>
In step S2203, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(B)). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes step S2304 of game start standby processing in FIG. 26, which will be described later, step S2509 of game setting screen processing in FIG. 28, which will be described later, or step S2611 of character selection screen processing in FIG. 29, which will be described later. It is determined whether the display screen is the top menu screen 72 based on whether the top menu screen display flag that is set to on in the transition process is on. If the display screen is the top menu screen 72 (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2204, and if the display screen is not the top menu screen 72 (step S2203: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2205.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 executes top menu screen processing and ends the game setting processing. Note that the top menu screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 25(C)). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to be set to ON in step S2409 of the top menu screen process in FIG. 27, which will be described later, or in the game setting screen transition process in step S2609 of the character selection screen process in FIG. 29, which will be described later. It is determined whether the display screen is the game setting screen 73 based on whether or not is on. When the display screen is the game setting screen 73 (step S2205: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2206, and when the display screen is not the game setting screen 73 (step S2205: No), the process moves to step S2207. do.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 executes game setting screen processing, and ends the game setting processing. Note that details of the game setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the character selection screen 74 (see FIG. 25(D)). Specifically, the MPU 51 changes the display screen based on whether or not the character selection screen display flag, which is set to on in the character selection screen transition process in step S2507 of the game setting process in FIG. 28, which will be described later, is on. It is determined whether or not the character selection screen 74 is displayed. If the display screen is the character selection screen 74 (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2208, and if the display screen is not the character selection screen 74 (step S2207: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2209. do.

<Step S2208>
In step S2208, the MPU 51 executes character selection screen processing, and ends the game setting processing. Note that details of the character selection screen process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, if the display screen is neither the fluctuation stop screen 71, the top menu screen 72, the game setting screen 73, nor the character selection screen 74, the MPU 51 executes other processing corresponding to the current display screen, and Finish the setting process.

[Game start standby processing]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game start standby process executed in step S2202 of the game setting process of FIG. In the game start standby process, the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25(A)) to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(B)) in response to the player's operation on the operation button 20. executed.

<Step S2301>
In step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 715 has started to change in the symbol display section 341. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not fluctuation of the main symbol has started based on whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. Note that the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 715 has started when the value of the variation display counter is not 0.

If the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2301: Yes), it ends the game start standby process, and if it determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has not started (step S2301: No). ), the process moves to step S2302.

<Step S2302>
In step S2302, the MPU 51 determines whether the operation button 20 has been operated by the player based on the first to third operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22(A)). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 has been operated (step S2302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2303, and if it determines that the operation button 20 has not been operated (step S2302: No), the MPU 51 starts the game. Terminates standby processing.

<Step S2303>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 determines whether a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed since the transition to the fluctuation stop screen 71. For example, when the fluctuation stop screen 71 is displayed (when the counter value of the fluctuation display counter becomes 0), the MPU 51 starts counting by a time counter, and stops the fluctuation by referring to the counter value of this time counter. It is possible to grasp the time elapsed since the screen 71 was displayed.

If the MPU 51 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S2303: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2304, and if it determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S2303: No), the MPU 51 executes the game start standby process. end.

<Step S2304>
In step S2304, since the MPU 51 can determine that the operation button 20 has been operated after a predetermined time after transitioning to the fluctuation stop screen 71 (Yes in step S2302 and step S2303), the MPU 51 responds to the operation on the operation button 20 by the player. The display screen is then shifted from the fluctuation stop screen 71 to the top menu screen 72. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON.

[Top menu screen processing]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the top menu screen process executed in step S2204 of the game setting process of FIG. 23. In the top menu screen processing, a screen corresponding to an item selected by the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21 from among the plurality of selection images 721 to 725 displayed on the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(B)), for example, a game A process of moving the display screen to the setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25(C)) is executed.

<Step S2401>
In step S2401, the MPU 51 determines whether fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started in the symbol display section 341 based on whether the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0 or not. If the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2402, and if it determines that the variation of the main symbol 715 has not started (step S2401: No). , the process moves to step S2403.

<Step S2402>
When the variation of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2401: Yes), the top menu screen display flag is set to OFF (step S2402), and the top menu screen processing ends.

<Step S2403>
In step S2403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 selects the upper selection operation pattern based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22(B)) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22(C)). It is determined whether the selection button 211 or the down selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

If the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S2403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2404, and if it determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S2403: No), the process proceeds to step S2404. The process moves to step S2405.

<Step S2404>
If it is determined that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S2403: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a temporary selection display change process to change the temporary selection display on the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(B)) (step S2404). ). For example, when the up selection button 211 is operated with the selection image 723 of "gaming settings customization" shown in FIG. to the side of the selected image 722. At this time, the selected image 723 is changed from a temporary selection display indicating that it has been temporarily selected to a normal display, while the selection image 722 is changed from its normal display to a temporary selection display. On the other hand, when the lower selection button 212 is operated with the selection image 723 of "gaming settings customization" temporarily selected, the MPU 51 moves the cursor image 726 to the side of the selection image 724 that is one level below the selection image 723. The selected image 723 is changed from the temporary selection display to the normal display, while the selected image 724 is changed from the normal display to the temporary selection display. When the process of step S2404 ends, the MPU 51 ends the top menu screen process.

Note that even if the left selection button 213 or right selection button 214 is operated when the display screen is the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(B)), the MPU 51 temporarily selects the cursor image 726 or the selection images 721 to 725. Processing such as display movement is not executed.

<Step S2405>
In step S2405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the decision button 21B. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the decision button 21B has been operated by the player based on the first to third decision operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22(F)).

If the MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B has been operated (step S2405: Yes), the process moves to step S2406, and if it determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S2405: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2406. Finish top menu screen processing.

<Step S2406>
In step S2406, the MPU 51 determines whether the "end" selection image 725 (see FIG. 25(B)) on the top menu screen 72 has been selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "End". If the MPU 51 determines that the "end" selection image 725 is selected (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2407, and if it determines that the "end" selection image 725 is not selected (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2407. S2406: No), the process moves to step S2408.

<Step S2407>
If it is determined that the "End" selection image 725 has been selected (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(B)) to the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25(A)). ) is executed (step S2407). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to OFF while setting the fluctuation stop screen display flag to ON, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S2408>
In step S2408, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 723 (see FIG. 25(B)) of "customize game settings" on the top menu screen 72 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "gaming setting customization". If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 723 of "Customize game settings" has been selected (step S2408: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2409, and determines that the selection image 723 of "Customize game settings" has not been selected. If so (step S2408: No), the process moves to step S2410.

<Step S2409>
If it is determined that the selection image 723 of "Customize game settings" has been selected (step S2408: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(B)) to the game settings screen 73 (see FIG. 25(C)). )) is executed (step S2409). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to OFF while setting the game setting screen display flag to ON, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S2410>
In step S2410, if the item selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B is other than "end" and "customize game settings", the MPU 51 causes the screen to shift to the display screen corresponding to the item selected by the player. . At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to OFF.

[Game setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting screen process executed in step S2206 of the game setting process of FIG. 23. In the game setting screen process, as shown in FIG. 24, the character selection screen 74 (see FIG. 25(D) ), a process of shifting the display screen to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(B)), etc. is executed.

<Step S2501>
In step S2501 of FIG. 28, the MPU 51 determines whether the main symbol 715 has started to fluctuate in the symbol display section 341 based on whether the counter value of the fluctuation display counter is 0 or not. If the MPU 51 determines that the main symbol 715 has started to fluctuate (step S2501: Yes), it moves the process to step S2502, and if it determines that the main symbol 715 has not started to fluctuate (step S2501: No). , the process moves to step S2503.

<Step S2502>
When the variation of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2501: Yes), the game setting screen display flag is set to OFF (step S2502), and the game setting screen process is ended.

<Step S2503>
In step S2503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 selects the upper selection operation pattern based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22(B)) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22(C)). It is determined whether the selection button 211 or the down selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

If the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S2503: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2504, and if it determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S2503: No), the process proceeds to step S2504. The process moves to step S2505.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is either the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, similar to the temporary selection display change processing of step S2404 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. In response to this, a temporary selection display changing process is executed to move the cursor image 726 and the temporary selection display up or down by one level on the game setting screen 94. When the process of step S2504 ends, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S2505>
In step S2505, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the decision button 21B based on the first to third decision operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22(F)). If the MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B has been operated (step S2505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2506, and if it determines that the decision button 21B has not been operated (step S2505: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2506. Finish the game setting screen process.

<Step S2506>
In step S2506, the MPU 51 determines whether the "character selection" selection image 733 (see FIG. 25(C)) on the game setting screen 73 has been selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item that was temporarily selected when the enter button 21B was operated is "character selection." If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 733 for "character selection" has been selected (step S2506: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2507, and if it determines that the selection image 733 for "character selection" has not been selected. (Step S2506: No), the process moves to step S2508.

<Step S2507>
If it is determined that the selection image 733 for "character selection" has been selected (step S2506: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25(C)) to the character selection screen 74 (see FIG. 25(D)). )) is executed (step S2507). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF while setting the setting item selection screen display flag to ON, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S2508>
In step S2508, the MPU 51 determines whether the "return to one" selection image 734 on the game setting screen 73 has been selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the temporarily selected item when the decision button 21B is operated is "return to one". If the MPU 51 determines that the "return to one" selection image 734 has been selected (step S2508: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2509, and determines that the "return to one" selection image 734 is not selected. If it is determined that (step S2508: No), the process moves to step S2510.

<Step S2509>
If it is determined that the selection image 734 of "Return to one" has been selected (step S2508: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25(C)) to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25(C)). A top menu screen transition process is executed to transition to (see B) (step S2509). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF while setting the top menu screen display flag to ON, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S2510>
In step S2510, the MPU 51 determines whether the "end" selection image 735 on the game setting screen 73 has been selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "End". If the MPU 51 determines that the "end" selection image 735 has been selected (step S2510: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2511, and if it determines that the "end" selection image 735 has not been selected (step S2510: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2511. S2510: No), the process moves to step S2512.

<Step S2511>
If it is determined that the "end" selection image 735 has been selected (step S2510: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25(C)) to the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25(A)). (see) is executed (step S2511). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF, while setting the fluctuation stop screen display flag to ON, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S2512>
In step S2512, if the item selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B is other than "character selection,""go back one step," and "end," the MPU 51 selects the item that corresponds to the item selected by the player. Move to display screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF.

[Character selection processing]
Here, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the character selection process executed in step S2208 of the game setting process of FIG. 23. In the character selection process, a process is executed to determine a selected character (a selected character to be displayed as a selected character image 714 (see FIG. 25(A))) selected by the player's operation on the selection determining unit 21 from among a plurality of characters. Furthermore, depending on the item selected by the player, processing is executed to shift the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the variation stop screen 71 or the top menu screen 72.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started in the symbol display section 341 based on whether the counter value of the fluctuation display counter is 0 or not. If the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2602, and if it determines that the variation of the main symbol 715 has not started (step S2601: No). , the process moves to step S2603.

<Step S2602>
When the variation of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF (step S2602), and ends the character selection screen process.

<Step S2603>
In step S2603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 controls the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, the first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and the first to third right selection operation pattern flags. Based on the flag (see FIGS. 22(B) to 22(E)), it is determined whether the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player. .

If the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S2603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2604, and if it determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S2603: No), the process proceeds to step S2604. The process moves to step S2605.

<Step S2604>
When it is determined that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S2603: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214. Depending on which one is, temporary selection display changing processing is executed to move the temporary selection display (step S2604). For example, when the upper selection button 211 is operated while the character selection image 741 is temporarily selected, the "end" selection image 748 is changed to a temporary selection display. When the lower selection button 212 is operated, the selection image 746 for "Go back one step" is changed to a temporary selection display. When the left selection button 213 is operated, the temporary selection display is changed by scrolling the character selection images 741 to 745 to the right one by one and moving the selection image 743 of character 9 to the center. Conversely, when the right selection button 214 is operated, the character selection images 741 to 745 are scrolled to the left one by one, and the character 2 selection image 742 is moved to the center, thereby changing the temporary selection display. do. When the process of step S2604 ends, the MPU 51 ends the character selection screen process.

<Step S2605>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the decision button 21B based on the first to third decision operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22(F)). If the MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B has been operated (step S2605: Yes), the process moves to step S2606, and if it determines that the decision button 21B has not been operated (step S2605: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2606. End character selection screen processing.

<Step S2606>
In step S2606, the MPU 51 determines whether the character selection image 741 has been selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the character selection image 741 has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated. If the MPU 51 determines that the character selection image 741 has been selected (step S2606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2607, and if it determines that the character selection image 741 has not been selected (step S2606: No), the process proceeds to step S2607. The process moves to step S2608.

<Step S2607>
If it is determined that the character selection image 741 has been selected (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 selects the character corresponding to the character selection image 741 that was provisionally selected when the enter button 21B was operated, and selects the selected character image 714 (Fig. 25(A)) is executed (step S2607), and the character selection screen process is ended.

Specifically, the MPU 51 updates information regarding the selected character stored in the RAM 512. For example, if it is stored in the RAM 512 that the selected character is character 2, and character 1 is determined as the selected character in step S2607, information indicating that the selected character is character 1 is stored in the RAM 512. Rewrite the content that was written.

Note that in the embodiment, the display screen does not shift from the character selection screen 74 to other screens such as the top menu screen 72 even when the character determination process is performed, but the display screen does not change to the character selection screen 74 when the character determination process is performed. The selection screen 74 may be moved to another screen such as the top menu screen 72.

<Step S2608>
In step S2608, the MPU 51 determines whether the "go back one step" selection image 746 has been selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the temporarily selected item when the enter button 21B is operated is "Go back one step." If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 746 for "Go back one step" has been selected (step S2608: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2609, and determines that the selection image 746 for "Go back one step" has not been selected. If so (step S2608: No), the process moves to step S2610.

<Step S2609>
If it is determined that the selection image 746 for “Go back one step” has been selected (step S2608: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a game setting screen transition process that transitions the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the game setting screen 73 ( Step S2609). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the character selection screen display flag to OFF while setting the game setting screen display flag to ON, and ends the character selection screen process.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether the "return to top menu" selection image 747 has been selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item that was temporarily selected when the enter button 21B was operated is "return to top menu." If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 747 for "Return to top menu" has been selected (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2611, and determines that the selection image 747 for "Return to top menu" has not been selected. If so (step S2610: No), the process moves to step S2612.

<Step S2611>
If it is determined that the selection image 747 for “return to top menu” has been selected (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen transition process to transition the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the top menu screen 72 (step S2611 ). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the character selection screen display flag to OFF while setting the top menu screen display flag to ON, and ends the character selection screen processing.

<Step S2612>
The MPU 51 determines that "end" has been selected when the character selection image is not selected and the selected item is other than "go back one step" and "return to top menu" by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. Since this can be determined, a fluctuation stop screen transition process is executed to shift the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the fluctuation stop screen 71 (step S2612), and the character selection screen process is ended. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the character selection screen display flag to OFF, while setting the fluctuation stop screen display flag to ON.

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S1909 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 19. In the command determination process, a command received from the main controller 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<Step S2701>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S2701, the MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received from the main controller 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S2701: Yes), the process moves to step S2702. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2701: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. Note that the command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. Note that the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2701 and becomes the target of processing, and is stored, for example, in the processing work storage area. be remembered.

<Step S2702>
In step S2702, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variable pattern command. Here, if the command is a variable pattern command (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2703, and if the command is not a variable pattern command (step S2702: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2706.

<Step S2703>
In step S2703, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of main symbols, variation type, and production type) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 31(A)), the fluctuation type table (see FIG. 31(B)), and the effect type table (see FIG. 31(B)), which are stored in the ROM 511 in advance. 32(A) to FIG. 32(C)) and the counter value of the production type counter stored in the RAM 512, the fluctuation pattern is determined. Moreover, when the variable pattern command includes information regarding the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets on the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability odd jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot. When is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON.

The stop symbol combination of the main symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the main symbol that is stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341, the second stop symbol is the main symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is the main symbol that is stopped and displayed last. It is a design that The performance type table includes a normal reach performance table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 32(A)), a super reach performance table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 32(B)), and a special reach performance table corresponding to special reach (see FIG. 32(B)). (see FIG. 32(C)).

Here, FIG. 31(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 31(A), in the first stop symbol selection table, the main symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, FIG. 31(A) shows a symbol combination "777" in which the main symbols are "1" to "9" and "333" is a probability-variable jackpot (either a 5R probability-variable jackpot or a 16R probability-variable jackpot). ” is a symbol combination that indicates a 16R fixed-variable jackpot, and that a double number other than “333” and “777” is a symbol combination that indicates either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R fixed-variable jackpot, or a 16R fixed-variable jackpot. It is a premise.

When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbols, and from main symbols other than "3" and "7". The first stopped symbol is determined with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination "333" or "777" indicating a 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot) is not displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, when the lottery result is "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", "7" is not allocated as the first stop symbol, but the first stop symbol is determined from main symbols other than "7" with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is a "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination "777" indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot will not be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is a "5R probability-variable jackpot", symbol combinations other than the "333" symbol combination indicating a 5R probability-variable jackpot may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", a zero number symbol combination other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R normal jackpot, can be stopped and displayed as the main symbol stop display result. Then, when the lottery result is "5R guaranteed strange jackpot" and a main symbol other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the first promotion effect flag to ON. . The first promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether to execute a variable promotion effect that clearly indicates a 5R fixed variable jackpot in a state that suggests a 5R normal jackpot (visual obstruction in FIG. 36). Step S2901 in the production determination process).

Furthermore, in the lottery result of "16R guaranteed strange jackpot", there is a distribution for all main symbols from "1" to "9", and the first stop is determined by a predetermined probability from the main symbols from "1" to "9". The design is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability-variable jackpot," the symbol combinations of zeros other than the "777" symbol combination indicating a 16R probability-variable jackpot may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "16R definite strange jackpot", the main symbol's stop display result is a zero number symbol combination other than the symbol combination "777" which suggests a 5R sure strange jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot. can be done. Then, when the lottery result is "16R guaranteed strange jackpot" and "3" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the second promotion effect flag to ON, and selects "3" as the first stop symbol. And when a main symbol other than "7" is determined, the MPU 51 sets the third promotion effect flag to ON. The second promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates a 16R variable jackpot in a state that suggests a 5R variable jackpot (visual obstruction in Figure 36). Step S2901 in the production determination process). The third promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a variable promotion effect that clearly indicates a 16R variable jackpot in a state that suggests a 5R normal jackpot (visual obstruction in Fig. 36). Step S2901 in the performance determination process).

When the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stop symbol combination to be stopped and displayed on the active line of the symbol display section 341 in the variable game is determined.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "missing", there is a distribution for all main symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined from the main symbols "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 51 selects the miss type selected based on the miss type table (see FIG. 8(D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol. A second stopped symbol is determined based on the stopped symbol. For example, when the miss type is front and back miss reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, if the miss type is reach other than front and back miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Determined by the design. Further, when the miss type is a complete miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be a different symbol from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The stop symbol combination of the main symbols may be determined by the display control device 6, in which only the first stop symbol is determined by the audio lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

Further, FIG. 31(B) is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 31(B), in the variation type table, the content of the variation display time and variation type corresponding to the variation pattern command is defined. For example, the variation pattern command "A01" whose lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the variation pattern is "01" is associated with the variation display time "30s" and the variation type "normal reach". In addition, the fluctuation pattern command "B02" whose lottery result is "5R guaranteed strange jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern is "02" is associated with the fluctuation display time "60s" and the fluctuation type "Super Reach", The variation pattern command "C03" whose result is "16R Probable Variable Jackpot" and whose variation pattern is "03" is associated with the variation display time "90s" and the variation type "Special Reach". Furthermore, the variation pattern command "D04" where the lottery result is "miss" and the variation pattern is "04" is associated with the variation display time "7s" and the variation type "no reach", and the lottery result is The variation pattern command "D05" which is "missing" and whose variation pattern is "05" is associated with the variation display time "10s" and the variation type "no reach".

Furthermore, FIGS. 32(A) to 32(C) are diagrams showing examples of production type tables. The performance type table is defined for each variation type. FIG. 32(A) is a normal reach effect table when the variation type is normal reach, FIG. 32(B) is a super reach effect table when the variation type is super reach, and FIG. 32(C) is a normal reach effect table when the variation type is super reach. This is a special reach effect table when the variation type is special reach. In addition, in this embodiment, the case where there are five types of effects corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example, but the types of effects may be six or more types. Moreover, in FIG. 32, the performance type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach performance table shown in FIG. 32(A), "performance ~ "Rendering X5" is defined. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is normal reach, it selects the performance type corresponding to the counter value of the performance type counter from the normal reach performance table according to the lottery result.

Furthermore, in the super reach performance table shown in FIG. 32(B), "performance Y1" to "performance Y5" are defined as performance types corresponding to the counter value of the performance type counter according to the lottery result. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is super reach, it selects the performance type corresponding to the counter value of the performance type counter from the super reach performance table according to the lottery result.

Furthermore, in the special reach performance table shown in FIG. 32(C), "performance Z1" to "performance Z5" are defined as performance types corresponding to the counter value of the performance type counter according to the lottery result. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is special reach, it selects the performance type corresponding to the counter value of the performance type counter from the special reach performance table according to the lottery result.

Then, the MPU 51 sets in the RAM 512 a display variation pattern command indicating the stop symbol combination of the main symbol, the variation type, and the production type determined based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the performance type table, and the performance type counter. This display variation pattern command is sent to the display control device 6 in step S2705, which will be described later. On the other hand, the display control device 6 that has received the display variation pattern command executes symbol variation display and effect display using the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command. Note that the display variation pattern command may include information as to whether or not there is a jackpot win.

<Step S2704>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 30, in step S2704, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the variable pattern command. Then, the variable display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S1907 in the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining time, etc. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol fluctuation display has ended when the count value of the fluctuation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S2705>
In step S2705, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 for specifying the stop symbol combination, variation type, and production type of the main symbols in the symbol display section 341, and ends the command determination process. let The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination, variation type, and production type of the main symbols determined in step S2703. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores main symbol fluctuation images, performance images, etc. corresponding to each display fluctuation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display on the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of the main symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display section 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes variable display of a plurality of main symbols (three in this embodiment) until a preset variable display time elapses. Then, the fluctuations of a plurality of main symbols are stopped and displayed in order. Then, when all the main symbols are stopped and displayed and the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed, a process corresponding to the symbol variation display of the next variable game or the jackpot game is executed. Here, during the fluctuating display of the main symbol, a performance corresponding to the content of the fluctuation type and performance type specified by the display fluctuation pattern command is executed.

<Step S2706>
In step S2706, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start a jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set on by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 at the start of the jackpot game as described above. Here, when the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2706: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2707, and when the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2706: No), the process The process moves to step S2709.

<Step S2707>
If the jackpot game start command is received (step S2706: Yes), the MPU 51 executes jackpot game performance determination processing (step S2707). The jackpot game performance determination process is a process for determining the performance to be executed on the symbol display section 341 and the like when the gaming state shifts to the jackpot game state. Note that details of the jackpot game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

<Step S2708>
In step S2708, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game performance start flag to ON when the jackpot game performance determination process ends, and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game performance start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the opening performance start process in step S3202 of the jackpot game performance process in FIG. 44, which will be described later.

<Step S2709>
In step S2709, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of starting a round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game and which round the round game is, and is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of the number of rounds of the round game, as shown in FIG. It is set in step S1813 of the opening/closing execution mode control process. Here, when the received command is a round game start command (step S2709: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2710, and when the received command is not a round game start command (step S2709: No), the process The process moves to step S2711.

<Step S2710>
In step S2710, the MPU 51 sets the round game production start flag to ON. At this time, the MPU 51 specifies the number of rounds of the round game to be started from the information regarding the number of rounds of the round game included in the round game start command, stores the number of rounds in the RAM 512, and ends the command determination process. do. The round game performance start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the round game performance process in step S3209 in the jackpot game performance process in FIG. 44, which will be described later. Further, the number of rounds of the round game stored in the RAM 512 in step S2710 is referred to when determining whether or not there is an unused round game in step S3016 in the error processing of FIG. 42, which will be described later.

<Step S2711>
In step S2711, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variable winning opening winning command. The variable winning hole winning command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that a game ball has won in the variable winning hole 316, and when a game ball has won in the variable winning hole 316, the prize ball command setting process ( It is set in step S1303) in FIG. Here, if the received command is a variable winning opening winning command (step S2711: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2712, and if the received command is not a variable winning opening winning command (step S2711: No). , the process moves to step S2713.

<Step S2712>
In step S2712, the MPU 51 executes a ball counting process. In this ball counting process, the cumulative number of winning balls to the variable winning opening 316 during the jackpot series is counted and stored. Specifically, each time the MPU 51 receives a variable winning opening winning command, it counts the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls (for example, 13) for winning into the variable winning opening 316, and stores it in the RAM 512 as the cumulative number of balls played. Make me remember. Incidentally, the cumulative ball output memory number stored in the RAM 512 is cleared after the jackpot series ends. Further, the ball output counting process may be a process of counting the cumulative number of winnings of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 and storing it in the RAM 512, without directly counting the cumulative number of balls that are played. Further, the ball output counting process may be a process of counting the so-called difference ball number, which is the difference between the number of game balls launched during a jackpot game (number of out balls) from the cumulative number of balls released during a jackpot game. The difference in the number of balls may be not only the number of game balls launched during the jackpot game, but also a game ball obtained by further subtracting the number of game balls launched in the probability variable time saving mode that shifts after the jackpot game. In addition, the ball counting process counts not only the cumulative number of balls that come out from the variable winning hole 316 but also the cumulative number of balls that come out by adding the number of prize balls from other winning holes such as the general winning hole 313. It may be a process.

Here, being in the jackpot consecutively means, for example, from the so-called first hit, where the jackpot lottery result for the variable game becomes a jackpot in the normal non-time-saving gaming state (low probability mode, not high-frequency support mode), the gaming state It includes all the jackpots until it falls into the normal non-time-saving gaming state, and the first jackpot is also included in the jackpot series. Further, consecutive jackpots can also be defined as all the jackpots until the gaming state falls to the normal time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the output ball counting process of step S2712, the cumulative number of output balls may be counted as the sum of the output balls for the winnings to the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, and the second operating opening 315. In this case, the cumulative number of balls put out may count only the balls put out during the jackpot game, or may also count the balls put out during the variable probability game state and the normal time-saving game state in addition to the jackpot game.

<Step S2713>
In step S2713, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the ending has started, that is, the opening/closing execution mode has ended, and when starting the ending, in step S1718 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. Set. Here, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2714 when the received command is an ending start command (step S2713: Yes), and moves the process to step S2714 when the received command is not an ending start command (step S2713: No). The process moves to S2715.

<Step S2714>
In step S2714, the MPU 51 sets the ending start flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The ending start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending effect start process in step S3212 in the jackpot game effect process in FIG. 44, which will be described later.

<Step S2715>
In step S2715, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to OFF by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 at the end of the jackpot game as described above. Here, when the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2715: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2716, and when the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2715: No), the process The process moves to step S2717.

<Step S2716>
In step S2716, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game performance end flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game performance end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending performance end process in step S3315 of the jackpot game performance in the jackpot game performance process of FIG. 44, which will be described later.

<Step S2717>
In step S2717, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a pending command. The pending commands include the first pending command and the second pending command as described above. The first hold command includes information that specifies the jackpot type or loss, the fluctuation pattern, and the number N of hold changes in the change display caused by winning the first operating port 314. The second hold command includes information specifying the jackpot type or loss, the fluctuation pattern, and the hold number M of the change display caused by winning the second operating port 315. Here, if the received command is a pending command (step S2717: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2718, and if the received command is not a held command (step S2717: No), the process moves to step S2719. Transition.

<Step S2718>
In step S2718, if the received hold command is the first hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or miss, fluctuation pattern, hold number N, etc. specified by the first hold command in the change type area of the RAM 512. . Similarly, when the received hold command is the second hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or miss, fluctuation pattern, hold number M, etc. specified by the second hold command in the change type area of the RAM 512. After executing step S2718, the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

<Step S2719>
In step S2719, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an error command. The error occurrence command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that an error has occurred, and when an error occurs, the error determination process (step S1007 in FIG. 9) is executed as an error occurrence command according to the type of error. ). Here, if the received command is an error command (step S2719: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2720, and if the received command is not an error command (step S2719: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2720. The process moves to S2721.

<Step S2720>
In step S2720, the MPU 51 sets the error occurrence flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The error occurrence flag is referred to when determining whether or not to display an error in step S3001 in error processing in FIG. 41, which will be described later.

<Step S2721>
In step S2721, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an error resolution command. The error resolution command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the error has been resolved. When the error is resolved, the error determination process in FIG. 9 (step S1007) is executed as an error resolution command according to the type of error. ). Here, if the received command is an error clearing command (step S2721: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2722, and if the received command is not an error clearing command (step S2721: No), the process moves to step S2722. The process moves to S2723.

<Step S2722>
In step S2722, the MPU 51 sets the error resolution flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The error cancellation flag is referred to when determining whether to cancel the error display in step S3007 in the error processing shown in FIG. 41, which will be described later.

<Step S2723>
In step S2723, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination processing.

[Jackpot game performance determination process]
Here, FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process executed in step S2707 of the command determination process in FIG. In the jackpot game performance determination process, performances to be performed in the jackpot game such as an opening performance, an opening/closing execution mode performance, and an ending performance to be performed in the jackpot game are determined.

<Step S2801>
In step S2801, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a so-called pending consecutive game will be executed after the end of the jackpot game. The reservation series is a jackpot (5R This is executed when information indicating that it is a probability-variable jackpot, a 16R probability-variable jackpot, or a 5R regular jackpot is included. That is, the holding consecutive games means that a jackpot game occurs in a fluctuating game where the upper limit is the number of holds M at the end of the jackpot game. For example, when the number of reservations M at the end of a jackpot game is 4, a case where a jackpot occurs in four variable games or less after shifting to the time saving mode is called a reservation consecutive game. Whether or not the hold consecutive games will be executed can be determined by, for example, referring to the variable type area of the RAM 512 and determining whether or not the jackpot type specified by the second hold command is stored.

However, in step S2801, the variable type area is referred to at the stage of starting the opening performance, and it is determined whether or not the held consecutive games are to be executed. That is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery from the start of the jackpot game performance to the end of the opening/closing execution mode performance is a jackpot, it will not be subject to the determination of pending consecutive games in step S2801. In addition, for example, when a game ball starts winning in the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 from the start of the jackpot game performance until the end of the opening/closing execution mode performance, a held consecutive winning winning performance is executed at the ending. In that case, whether or not the held consecutive games will be executed is determined by the pending consecutive games that clearly indicate that the pending consecutive games will be performed in the ending performance start process of step S3214 in the jackpot game performance process of FIG. 44, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not to execute the confirmed performance.

<Step S2802>
When the held consecutive games are executed (step S2801: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the held consecutive games flag to ON (step S2802). The pending consecutive game flag is referred to in step S2907 of the visibility inhibiting effect determination process in FIG. 36, which will be described later, when determining whether or not to execute the pending consecutive game confirming performance as the visual recognition inhibiting performance.

<Step S2803>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 executes a process of determining an opening effect to be executed during the opening after shifting to the jackpot game until starting the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening performance according to the symbol combination of the main symbols that are stopped and displayed, based on an opening performance table stored in the ROM 511, for example. Furthermore, the MPU 51 transmits information on the determined opening performance type to the display control device 6 as an opening performance command. Here, as an opening effect, the MPU 51 provides an effect that clearly indicates a 16R guaranteed odd jackpot when the symbol combination is "777", and a 5R guaranteed odd jackpot when the symbol combination is "333". If the suggested effect or symbol combination is a double number other than "777" or "333," a effect indicating a 5R normal jackpot is determined. That is, the opening performance is determined not according to the jackpot type but according to the symbol combination of the main symbols that are stopped and displayed.

Further, in the opening performance, a specific image such as an image showing the number of successive jackpots may be displayed. Here, the number of successive jackpots is as described in step S2712 above, and is, for example, the number of jackpots from the first win until the gaming state falls to the normal non-time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, specific images displayed in the opening performance include, for example, images of characters including the selected character.

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 specifies the jackpot type and the selected character. The MPU 51 specifies the jackpot type based on the jackpot flag types (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot flag) that are set to ON in step S2703 of the command determination process in FIG. 30. On the other hand, by referring to the RMA 512, the MPU 51 specifies which of, for example, characters 1 to 9 the selected character is.

<Steps S2805 and S2806>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 determines an opening/closing execution mode performance determination table according to the jackpot type and selected character specified in step S2804, and further performs a process of determining an opening/closing execution mode performance based on the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table. Execute (step S2806).

Here, FIG. 34 shows an example of an opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 5R, and FIG. 35 shows an example of an opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 16R.

The 5R opening/closing execution mode performance determination table shown in FIG. 34 is a table that is referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the opening/closing execution mode performance at the time of the 5R jackpot. That is, the MPU 51 determines the opening/closing execution mode presentation at the time of the 5R jackpot using the same opening/closing execution mode presentation determination table for 5R, regardless of whether the 5R normal jackpot or the 5R probability variable jackpot is used. Of course, different 5R opening/closing execution mode effect determination tables may be prepared for the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R certain variable jackpot, and the 5R opening/closing execution mode effect may be determined based on them.

This opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 5R includes a performance scenario table corresponding to the selected character. In this embodiment, since any one of characters 1 to 9 can be selected as the selected character, the opening/closing execution mode production determination table for 5R includes nine production scenario tables corresponding to characters 1 to 9, respectively. include. In addition, in FIG. 34, each production scenario table is expressed as "5R character N production scenario table" (N is an integer from 1 to 9). Each performance scenario table includes a performance scenario type, a round game performance character type, and a scenario type counter.

The performance scenario type specifies the combination of round game performances to be executed in the 1R to 5R round games. In this embodiment, five performance scenarios are set for each of the selected characters, and character performance (hereinafter referred to as "specific character performance") in which the selected character is the main character is executed for each scenario. Here, as the character performance in the round game, for example, playback of a promotional video (PV) of the character, display of a character introduction video or still image, etc. can be considered.

Note that the number of performance scenarios for the selected characters is not limited to five, and may be any other number, and there is no need to set the same number of scenarios for each selected character. In addition, in each scenario, character performances are performed in all round games, but character performances are performed in some round games, and round game performances other than character performances are performed in other round games. good.

The round game performance character type specifies the round game performance to be executed in each round game of 1R to 5R. In addition, in FIG. 34, a character presentation whose main character is character N (N is an integer from 1 to 9) is expressed as "Character N" (N is an integer from 1 to 9). A specific character performance is defined for each scenario, and it is determined that this specific character performance will be executed in the same round (specific unit game) no matter which scenario is selected. In this embodiment, it is determined that the specific character performance is performed in 1R of each scenario. That is, in the 5R jackpot game, a specific character performance is always performed for the selected character in the 1st round game. Therefore, since the player can know in advance the round game in which the specific character performance will be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the specific character performance for the selected character by focusing on the variable winning hole 316, for example. Note that the specific character performance does not necessarily need to be performed in the 1R, and may be performed in the 2R or later rounds.

The scenario type counter is a counter for selecting a performance scenario, and a performance scenario is associated with each count value in a predetermined range of this scenario type counter. For example, in the production scenario table for 5R character 1, the counter value of the scenario type counter "0 to 39" corresponds to "Character 1 Scenario A", the counter value of "40 to 79" corresponds to "Character 1 Scenario B", A value of "80 to 119" corresponds to "Character 1 Scenario C," a counter value of "120 to 159" corresponds to "Character 1 Scenario D," and a counter value of "160 to 199" corresponds to "Character 1 Scenario E." are associated. The scenario type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 199, and is incremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S1907 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. It is possible to determine the performance scenario based on the count value of the scenario type counter acquired at the time. For example, when the selected character is "Character 1" and the counter value of the scenario type counter is "88", "Character 1 Scenario C" is determined as the production scenario.

The 16R opening/closing execution mode performance determination table shown in FIG. 35 is a table that is referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the opening/closing execution mode performance at the time of the 16R jackpot. This opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 16R, like the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 5R, includes a performance scenario table corresponding to a selected character consisting of a performance scenario type, a round game performance character type, and a scenario type counter. The performance scenario type, round game performance character type, and scenario type counter have already been explained in the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 5R, so their explanation will be omitted here. Note that the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 16R also determines that the specific character performance will be performed in the same round no matter which scenario is selected.

In the present embodiment, the 16R opening/closing execution mode effect determination table has a larger number of scenarios in each scenario table than the 5R opening/closing execution mode effect determination table, and 12 scenarios are set. Of course, the number of scenarios in each scenario table in the 16R opening/closing execution mode production determination table may be the same as the 5R opening/closing execution mode production determination table, or even if it is less than the 5R opening/closing execution mode production determination table. good. In addition, the opening/closing execution mode production determination table is not limited to the one that executes a production with a different character type for each round game, but also the one that executes a production with a different character type at regular intervals (for example, the maximum opening time of the variable prize opening 316). It may be something that does.

Furthermore, in the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table of this embodiment, the specific character performance for the selected character is fixed for one round (specific round) of the round game, but if the game situation is advantageous for the player, For example, if a pending series of wins is confirmed, or if the next jackpot is expected to be relatively successful, such as in the case of a certain variable jackpot, the game situation is advantageous for such players. A specific character performance may not be executed in a certain jackpot game. Thereby, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to whether the specific character performance is executed in one round of the round game. Note that if the specific character performance is not performed in the jackpot game because the game situation is advantageous to the player, the specific character performance may be performed multiple times in the next jackpot game. For example, a specific character performance may be performed in all round games in the opening/closing execution mode, or in addition to all round games in the opening/closing execution mode, a specific character performance may be performed in at least one of the opening and ending. It may also be executed. Thereby, if the specific character performance was not executed in the previous jackpot game, the player can enjoy the specific character performance in the current jackpot game up to the extent of the previous jackpot game. In addition, regarding the execution of specific character performances in all round games in the opening/closing execution mode, the condition is that the game situation is advantageous for the player, such as when it is a guaranteed strange jackpot or when a pending consecutive win is confirmed. Good too.

<Step S2807>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 33, in step S2807, the MPU 51 executes a process to determine the ending effect to be executed in the ending after the opening/closing execution mode ends until the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the ending effect according to the type of jackpot based on the ending effect table stored in the ROM 511, for example. Furthermore, the MPU 51 transmits information on the determined ending effect type to the display control device 6 as an ending effect command.

Here, the ending effect informs the player that the jackpot game will end after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In addition, in the ending performance, information such as the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the variable game that triggered the execution of the jackpot game (clarification of the gaming state to which the jackpot game will be transferred after the end of the jackpot game) is displayed on the symbol display section 341. Ru. Specifically, in the ending performance, the lottery result is in the normal time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode) or the normal non-time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and not high-frequency support mode). If the jackpot, the so-called first hit, is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, an image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 that clearly indicates that the transition will be made to a probability variable time-saving gaming state, which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode. When the first hit is a 5R normal jackpot, an image clearly indicating that the game will shift to the normal non-time-saving gaming state is displayed on the symbol display section 341. An example of an image that clearly indicates the transition to the variable time-saving gaming state is "○○ RUSH entry". On the other hand, an image that clearly indicates the transition to the normal non-time-saving gaming state is, for example, "entering the chance zone", and the number of time-saving times is also displayed. In addition, in the ending performance when the lottery result becomes a jackpot in the probability variable time-saving gaming state, an image clearly indicating that the game will shift to the probability variable time-saving gaming state again is displayed on the symbol display section 341. An image that clearly indicates that the game will shift to the variable time saving gaming state again is, for example, "○○ RUSH continuation". In addition, the ending effect includes an image that shows the number of transitions to the variable time-saving game state (for example, the number of times RUSH continues) in response to the first hit, and an image of the character that appeared in the jackpot effect in the variable game that led to the jackpot game. It may be displayed on the display section 341. An image indicating the number of transitions to the variable time saving gaming state and a character image are determined in step S2807.

Furthermore, in the ending performance, images related to balls released, such as the number of balls released in the jackpot game and the total number of balls released during consecutive games, are displayed on the pattern display section 341. Furthermore, the ending effect may be one that displays a confirmed image or the like that clearly indicates that a pending series of games to be described later will be executed. These images are determined, for example, in the ending effect start process of step S3214 in the jackpot game effect process which will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2808>
In step S2808, the MPU 51 executes a visibility inhibiting effect determination process that inhibits the visual recognition of the image game effect executed on the symbol display section 341, and ends the jackpot game effect process. The details of the visual recognition inhibition effect determination process will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 36 to 40.

In the jackpot game performance determination process shown in FIG. 33, the opening performance, opening/closing execution mode performance, ending performance, and visibility obstructing performance are determined in this order, but the order in which each performance is determined is limited to the order shown in FIG. 33. Not done. For example, the ending performance may be determined before the opening/closing execution mode rendering, or the visibility inhibiting rendering may be determined before at least one of the opening/closing execution mode rendering and the ending rendering. Further, the opening/closing execution mode performance or the visibility inhibiting performance is not limited to the time when the jackpot game start command is received (at the start of the jackpot game), but may be determined at the time of starting the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the visibility inhibition performance is determined before the opening/closing execution mode performance, the opening/closing execution mode performance is determined so that the specific character performance for the selected character is executed in a round game in which the visibility inhibition performance is not performed. This point will be described later as a ninth embodiment with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

[Visibility obstruction effect determination process]
Here, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the visual recognition inhibiting performance determination process executed in step S2808 of the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 33. In the visibility inhibition performance determination process, it is determined whether or not to perform the visibility inhibition performance, and if the visibility inhibition performance is to be executed, the timing for executing the visibility inhibition performance is determined.

Here, the visibility obstructing performance is a performance that obstructs the visual recognition of the image game performance executed on the symbol display section 341, which obstructs the visibility of a part of the game image performance, and makes a part of the game image performance visible. This includes performances that obstruct the visual recognition of all or substantially all of the performances and game image performances, and that make the game image performances completely or hardly visible. Further, the visibility inhibition effect is not limited to the effect executed on the symbol display section 341, such as a layered image effect in which an image is displayed in a visible layer on the display screen of the symbol display section 341, for example. Front display image production performed on a translucent front display disposed so as to cover the symbol display section 341 on the front, and movable function in which the movable accessory member 39 moves to a position covering the display screen of the symbol display section 341. Including role-playing effects. Furthermore, the layer image effect includes, for example, an effect in which a layer image is displayed superimposed on the game image effect on the symbol display section 341, thereby obstructing the visibility of part or all of the game image, as well as the execution of the game image effect. This includes an effect in which a layer image is displayed on the entire display screen of the symbol display section 341 in place of the game image effect. In addition, the layer images displayed superimposed on the game image presentation are not only non-transparent layer images in which the images of the lower layer cannot be seen, but also layers in which the lower layer image can be seen, such as faintly or vaguely. Contains transparent layer images that allow you to see layer images.

In the following, before explaining the visual recognition inhibiting performance determination process shown in FIG. 36, the opening/closing execution mode performance and the visual recognition inhibiting performance will first be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40.

FIG. 37(A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a round game in which the opening/closing execution mode performance scenario determined in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 33 and the visibility obstructing performance are executed. In addition, in FIG. 37(A), the opening/closing execution mode performance is an example when "Character 1 Scenario A" is determined as the performance scenario in a 16R probability variable jackpot game where the selected character is Character 1. The opening/closing execution mode performance of the 16R jackpot "Character 1 Scenario A" is a round game performance in which character performances mainly consisting of character 1, character 2, character 14, character 7... and character 10 are executed in this order. be done. Here, the specific character performance for the selected character is fixed and executed in one round (first unit game) as described later (see FIGS. 34 and 35). In the example of FIG. 37(A), the selected character is character 1, and the specific character performance for character 1 is performed in one round.

Further, in the example of FIG. 37(A), as the visual recognition obstructing effect, a specific number of balls display effect is executed in the second round, a hold consecutive winnings confirmation effect is executed in the third round, and a promotion effect is executed in the fourth round. Then, for a round in which a specific number of balls out display effect is executed, the specific number out ball display flag stored in the RAM 512 is set to ON, and for a round in which a specific number out ball display effect is not executed, a specific number out ball display flag is set. is set to off. In the example of FIG. 37(A), the specific number of balls out display flag is set to on for two rounds in which the specific number of balls out display effect is executed, and the specific number of balls out display flag is set to off in other rounds. (See steps S2915 and S2916 in FIG. 36).

In the gaming machine 10, while it is determined that the specific character performance for the selected character is executed in one round as described above (see steps S2804 to S2806 in FIG. 33, FIGS. 34 and 35), It is determined that each of the retained consecutive winnings confirmation performance and promotion performance, which are visual recognition obstructing performances, will be executed after the second round (steps S2906 and S2911 in FIG. 36).

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the jackpot game performance (opening performance, opening/closing execution mode performance, ending performance, and visibility obstructing performance) determined in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 33 is carried out in the jackpot game performance process of FIG. executed.

By the way, conventional gaming machines display still images such as character introduction images in addition to moving images such as PV (promotional videos) of characters appearing in the production of variable games during round games in jackpot games. be. In addition, in jackpot games, we carry out promotion effects that suggest or clearly indicate promotion from normal jackpots to fixed-variable jackpots, etc., and pending continuous winning confirmation effects that clearly indicate that you have won a jackpot that becomes a pending consecutive winning after playing a jackpot game. There are also gaming machines that do this.

However, the promotion performance and the hold consecutive winnings confirmation performance are generally performed while obstructing the visual recognition of the performance for the character. For example, a movable accessory member operates to cover the symbol display section, and an overlay image that notifies the result of a promotion effect or that a pending series of wins is confirmed is displayed on the symbol display section. Visual recognition of the performance is obstructed. Therefore, at the timing when the performance of the player's favorite character is being executed, the visibility of the performance of the player's favorite character may be obstructed by the movable accessory or the overlay image. When such a situation occurs, the player cannot fully enjoy the performance of his or her favorite character.

In contrast, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the specific character performance for the selected character is executed at a different timing from the visibility inhibiting performance that inhibits the visual recognition of the specific character performance. That is, in the gaming machine 10, in each jackpot game, a specific character effect is fixed and executed in a specific round game among a plurality of round games, and a visibility obstructing effect is executed in a round game different from this specific round. do. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, a visibility inhibiting performance that obstructs the visibility of a character performance, such as a promotion performance or a hold consecutive winnings confirmation performance, is performed during one round (specific round), which is a round of execution of a specific character performance for a selected character. Executed after the second round when avoided. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the selected character in the specific character performance in the jackpot game without the visual recognition of the specific character performance for the selected character being obstructed by the visibility inhibiting performance.

Further, FIG. 37(B) is a diagram showing an example of the round game performance screen 81. As shown in FIG. 37(B), the round game production screen 81 includes a round number display image 811, a jackpot round number display image 812, and a character introduction image 813.

The round number display image 811 is an image that displays the number of rounds being executed. The round number display image 811 shown in FIG. 37(B) shows that there are four rounds in progress.

The jackpot round number display image 812 is an image that suggests the maximum number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game. The jackpot round number display image 812 shown in FIG. 37(B) indicates that the maximum number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game is 5 rounds, that is, the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R certain variable jackpot. There is.

The character introduction image 813 is a still image displayed in the character performance, and is for displaying the characteristics of the character displayed in the variable game performance. In the character introduction image 813 shown in FIG. 37(B), the characteristics of the character 7 are displayed together with the image of the character 7. In addition, in FIG. 37(B), an example was explained in which the introduction image of the selected character is displayed as a still image as a specific character presentation for the selected character, but the specific character presentation may also be one that introduces the selected character in a moving image. Often, it may be a combination of moving images and still images. Further, the specific character performance is not limited to displaying an image introducing the selected character, and is not particularly limited as long as it is a moving image such as a promotional video or an image mainly featuring the selected character.

Further, FIGS. 38(A) to 38(F) are diagrams showing an example of a promotion effect executed as a visual recognition obstructing effect in a jackpot game effect. The promotion effect includes promotion success effects shown in FIGS. 38(A) to 38(C) and promotion failure effects shown in FIGS. 38(A), 38(E), and 38(F). In the opening/closing execution mode performance shown in FIG. 37(A), the promotion performance is executed in the fourth round of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 38(A), in the promotion performance, the round game performance screen 81 (see FIG. 37(B)) first shifts to the button operation request screen 82 in both the promotion success performance and the promotion failure performance. The button operation request screen 82 is a screen in which an operation button image 821 imitating the operation button 20 is superimposed on the round game production screen 81 as an overlay image, and is a screen that prompts the player to operate the operation button 20. . On this button operation request screen 82, the operation button image 821 obstructs the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as a character effect, so the effect of displaying the operation button image 821 corresponds to the visibility obstructing effect of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 38(B), in the promotion success performance, the round game in which the display of the operation button image 821 is canceled is provided on the condition that the operation button 20 is operated by the player while the operation button image 821 is displayed. At the same time as the transition to the performance screen 81, a movable accessory activation performance in which the movable accessory member 39 moves from the standby position to the operating position is executed. In the state where the movable accessory member 39 has moved to the operating position, the round game performance screen 81 is covered by the movable accessory member 39, and visibility of the round game performance screen 81 is obstructed. That is, the movable accessory operation performance in the successful promotion performance is performed as a performance that obstructs the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character performance. In addition, in the promotion performance, if the operation button 20 is not operated while the operation button image 821 is displayed, the movable accessory operation performance may be executed immediately after the display of the operation button image 821 is canceled, or the movable accessory operation performance may be performed again. As a performance, a movable accessory activation performance may be performed immediately after the end of the round game or at the ending, or a promotion performance may be postponed in the jackpot game.

As shown in FIGS. 38(C) and 38(D), in the successful promotion performance, after the movable accessory activation performance is executed, the movable accessory member 39 returns from the operating position to the standby position, and the display screen changes to a round shape. The screen shifts from the game performance screen 81 to the promotion success performance screen 83, and returns to the round game performance screen 81 after a certain period of time has elapsed. The promotion success effect screen 83 shown in FIG. 38(C) is a screen that clearly indicates that the promotion success effect has been executed, and includes a character image 831 that clearly indicates the promotion success, such as "Congratulations on your promotion!!". This character image 831 is superimposed and displayed on the entire round game performance screen 81 as an overlay image of the round game performance screen 81, and completely obstructs the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character performance. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character image 831 as a promotion success effect corresponds to the visibility obstructing effect of the present invention.

Further, in the round game production screen 81 shown in FIG. 38(D), the round number display image changes from one suggesting that the jackpot type is 5R to a jackpot round number display image clearly indicating that the jackpot type is 16R. 812. That is, in this embodiment, as the jackpot round number display image 812 on the round game performance screen 81, an image suggesting that the jackpot type is 5R is displayed before the successful promotion performance is executed, and after the successful promotion performance is executed. An image clearly indicating that the jackpot type is 16R is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the promotion success effect clearly indicates the promotion from 5R normal jackpot or 5R definite strange jackpot to 16R jackpot, but the promotion effect clearly indicates the promotion from 5R normal jackpot to 5R definite strange jackpot. It may be executed as if Furthermore, the promotion success effect may be executed as a presentation that displays a promotion confirmation image that clearly indicates promotion success, for example, the image shown in FIG. 38(C), without executing the movable accessory operation effect. On the contrary, the successful promotion performance may be a performance that executes a movable accessory operation performance without displaying a promotion confirmation image that clearly indicates successful promotion. Furthermore, the promotion confirmed image does not need to be displayed as a non-transparent image on the entire round game performance screen 81 in which the lower layer image cannot be seen at all, as shown in FIG. 38(C); The lower layer image may be displayed as a transparent image that can be seen faintly or vaguely in both cases where the round game presentation screen 81 is partially or completely covered. It's okay. Furthermore, the promotion performance may be a performance in which a movable accessory activation performance is executed without transitioning to the button operation request screen 82 that displays the operation button image 821 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 20. good. Further, the promotion success effect may be achieved by configuring the movable accessory member 39 as having a display such as a liquid crystal display device, and displaying a promotion confirmation image clearly indicating that the jackpot type is 16R on this display. good.

As shown in FIGS. 38(E) and 38(F), in the promotion failure performance, the display screen shifts from the round game performance screen 81 to the promotion failure performance screen 84, and a certain period of time (for example, 1 second to 5 seconds) is displayed. After the elapse of time, the screen returns to the round game presentation screen 81. The promotion failure performance screen 84 shown in FIG. 38(E) is a screen that clearly indicates that the promotion failure performance has been executed, and includes a character image 841 that clearly indicates promotion failure as "ZANNEN". This character image 841 is superimposed and displayed on the entire round game performance screen 81 as an overlay image of the round game performance screen 81, and obstructs the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character performance. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character image 841 corresponds to the visibility obstructing effect of the present invention.

Note that the promotion failure performance may be performed as a performance in which the movable accessory member 39 does not operate without displaying the character image 841 clearly indicating promotion failure. Further, the promotion confirmed image can be changed in the same way as the promotion confirmed image. That is, the promotion confirmed image does not need to be displayed on the entire round game performance screen 81 as a non-transparent image in which the lower layer image cannot be seen at all, as shown in FIG. 38(E); The lower layer image may be displayed as a transparent image that can be seen faintly or vaguely in both cases where the round game presentation screen 81 is partially or completely covered. You can.

Further, on the round game production screen 81 shown in FIG. 38(F), a jackpot round number display image 812 is displayed that clearly indicates that the jackpot type is 5R. That is, in this embodiment, the jackpot round number display image 812 on the round game performance screen 81 does not change before and after the promotion failure performance is executed.

FIG. 39(A) to FIG. 39(C) are diagrams showing an example of a held consecutive winnings confirmation effect executed as a visual recognition obstructing effect in a jackpot game effect. As shown in FIG. 39(A), in the held consecutive game confirmation performance, a movable accessory activation performance in which the movable accessory member 39 moves from the standby position to the activation position is first performed on the round game performance screen 81. In the state where the movable accessory member 39 has moved to the operating position, the round game performance screen 81 is covered by the movable accessory member 39, and visibility of the round game performance screen 81 is obstructed. That is, the movable role object activation performance in the held consecutive winnings confirmation performance is performed as a performance that obstructs the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character performance.

As shown in FIG. 39(B), in the held consecutive game confirmation performance, after the execution of the movable accessory activation performance, the movable accessory member 39 returns from the operating position to the standby position, and the display screen changes to the round game performance screen 81. The screen shifts to the pending consecutive game confirmation display screen 85, and returns to the round game presentation screen 81 after a certain period of time (for example, 1 second to 5 seconds) has elapsed. The held consecutive games confirmation display screen 85 shown in FIG. 39(B) is a screen that clearly indicates that the suspended consecutive games will be executed, and clearly indicates that the suspended consecutive games will be executed with "Hold consecutive games confirmed". Contains a character image 851. This character image 851 is superimposed and displayed on the entire round game performance screen 81 as an overlay image of the round game performance screen 81, and obstructs the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character performance. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character image 851 corresponds to the visibility obstructing effect of the present invention.

In addition, the held consecutive games confirmation performance is a pending consecutive consecutive games confirmation image that clearly indicates that the pending consecutive games will be executed without executing the movable role object operation performance, for example, the pending consecutive games finalized image shown in FIG. 39(B). It may be executed as an effect to display. Further, the held consecutive winnings confirmation performance may be one in which a movable accessory activation performance is executed after transitioning to the button operation request screen 82 that displays an operation button image 821 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 20. good. Further, in the held consecutive winnings confirmation performance, the movable accessory member 39 may be configured to include a display such as a liquid crystal display device, and this held consecutive winnings confirmation image may be displayed.

FIGS. 40(A) to 40(C) are diagrams showing an example of a specific number of balls displayed as a visual recognition inhibiting effect in a jackpot game effect. As shown in FIGS. 40(A) to 40(C), in the specific number of balls output display effect, the display screen shifts from the round game effect screen 81 to the specific number of balls output display image display screen 86, and for a certain period of time (for example, 1 second to 5 seconds), the display screen returns from the specific number of balls displayed image display screen 86 to the round game performance screen 81. The specific number of balls put out display image display screen 86 includes an image that notifies the player that the number of balls put out has reached a specific number.

Here, the specific number of balls displayed is a display for the cumulative number of balls played, which is the sum of the number of balls won in the variable winning slot 316 in a series of jackpots (continuous jackpots) starting from the first hit. The so-called difference obtained by subtracting the number of game balls launched during a jackpot game (or the number of game balls launched during a jackpot game, as well as the number of game balls launched in the variable time saving mode that shifts after a jackpot game) from the number of balls. Executed as a display for the number of balls, or as a display for the cumulative number of balls put out by adding not only the cumulative number of balls put out for the number of prize balls from the variable winning hole 316 but also the number of prize balls from other winning holes such as the general winning hole 313. be done.

The specific number of balls output display image display screen 86 in FIG. 40(B) includes a character image 861 of "3000 shots OVER" which informs that the number of balls output has reached 3000. This character image 861 is superimposed and displayed on the entire round game performance screen 81 as an overlay image of the round game performance screen 81, and obstructs the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character performance. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character image 861 corresponds to the visibility obstructing effect of the present invention. Further, the specific number of balls displayed on the display screen 86 does not necessarily have to be an overlay image of the round game performance screen 81. That is, on the specific number of balls displayed image display screen 86, the character image 861 may be displayed without executing the round game performance in the lower layer.

Here, the specific number is set to, for example, a positive integer multiple of the minimum specific number. The minimum specific number is set to 1000, for example. Of course, the specific number is not limited to 1000, and may be other numbers such as 500 or 2000.

<Steps S2901 and S2902>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 36, in step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether any of the first to third promotion effect flags set to on in step S2703 in the command determination process of FIG. It is determined whether a promotion performance is to be executed as a round game performance in the execution mode. If any of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the promotion effect flag that is set to ON to OFF (step S2902), and executes the process. The process moves to step S2906. On the other hand, if the first to third promotion effect flags are all set to OFF (step S2901: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2903.

<Step S2903>
In step S2903, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot type is a 5R jackpot. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is a 5R jackpot in which a promotion effect is executed or a 16R jackpot in which a promotion effect is not executed. Here, if the jackpot type is a 5R jackpot (step S2903: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2904, and if the jackpot type is not a 5R jackpot (step S2903: No), that is, if it is a 16R jackpot, The process moves to step S2907.

<Step S2904 and Step S2905>
If the jackpot type is not a 5R jackpot (step S2903: No), the MPU 51 performs a lottery to determine whether to execute the promotion failure effect (step S2904), and determines whether the result is to execute the promotion failure effect. (Step S2905). That is, in this embodiment, when a lottery is won in the 5R jackpot, a promotion failure performance is executed. Of course, without performing a lottery, the promotion failure effect may be always executed when the promotion effect flag is set to OFF on the condition that the jackpot type is a 5R jackpot.

<Step S2906>
In step S2906, the MPU 51 sets the number of rounds of the round game in which the promotion effect is executed to the second round or later. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the number of rounds of the round game in which the successful promotion effect is executed to 2, on the condition that any of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON (step S2901: Yes). Set after the first round. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 wins the lottery to execute the promotion failure effect (step S2905: Yes), the number of rounds of the round game in which the promotion failure performance is executed is set to the second round or later. For example, the MPU 51 determines the round in which the promotion effect is to be performed based on a lottery table for determining the promotion effect in the second round or later (for example, a lottery table in which there is no winning value for executing the promotion effect in the first round). do. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 37(A), the promotion effect is set to be executed in four rounds.

Through this step S2906, when executing a promotion effect that is a visibility obstructing effect, it is determined that the promotion effect is executed in the second round or later, avoiding the first round (specific round), which is the execution round of a specific character effect for the selected character. Then, the promotion performance determined to avoid the specific round is executed in step S3404 in the round game performance process of FIG. 46, which will be described later.

<Steps S2907 and S2908>
In step S2907, the MPU 51 determines whether the pending consecutive winnings flag set to on in step S2802 in the jackpot performance determination process of FIG. Decide whether to execute it or not. If the pending consecutive games flag is set to ON (step S2907: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the pending consecutive games flag to OFF (step S2908), and moves the process to step S2909. On the other hand, if the pending consecutive games flag is set to OFF (step S2906: No), the MPU 51 ends the visual recognition obstructing effect determination process.

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
In step S2909, the MPU 51 temporarily sets the number of rounds of the round game in which the held consecutive winnings confirmation effect is executed to the second round or later, on the condition that the pending consecutive winnings flag is set to ON (step S2907: Yes). Then, it is further determined whether the round in which the tentatively set hold consecutive game confirmation effect is executed matches the round in which the promotion effect is executed (step S2910). For example, the MPU 51 determines the pending consecutive winnings based on a lottery table (for example, a lottery table in which there is no winning value for executing the pending consecutive winnings confirmation performance in the first round) for determining the pending consecutive winnings confirmation performance in the second round or later. Determine the round in which the final performance will be performed.

Here, if the execution round of the provisionally set pending consecutive game confirmation performance matches the execution round of the promotion performance (step S2910: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2909. That is, until the MPU 51 determines that the provisionally set execution round of the suspended consecutive game confirmation performance does not match the execution round of the promotion performance (step S2910: No), the MPU 51 temporarily executes the execution round of the suspended consecutive game confirmation performance in step S2909. The setting and the judgment as to whether the execution round of the provisionally set hold consecutive winnings confirmation performance in step S2910 matches the execution round of the promotion performance are repeatedly performed. On the other hand, if the execution round of the provisionally set pending consecutive game confirmation performance does not match the execution round of the promotion performance (step S2910: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2911.

<Step S2911>
In step S2911, the MPU 51 sets the execution round of the held consecutive game confirmation performance, which was provisionally set after the second round in step S2909, as the round in which the held consecutive game confirmation performance is executed. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 37(A), it is set that the held consecutive game confirmation effect is executed in three rounds.

Through these steps S2909 to S2911, when executing a suspended consecutive winning performance that is a visibility obstructing performance, the suspended consecutive winnings will be executed after the 2nd round that avoids the 1st round (specific round), which is the execution round of the specific character performance for the selected character. It is decided to execute the winning consecutive winning performance, and the pending consecutive winning winning performance determined to avoid the specific round is executed in step S3406 in the round game performance processing of FIG. 46, which will be described later. Further, step S2910 prevents the execution round of the pending consecutive winning performance from being the same as not only the execution round of the specific character performance but also the execution round of the promotion performance. On the other hand, the promotion (success) performance and the held consecutive winnings confirmation performance, which are visual recognition obstructing performances, are performances that clearly indicate to the player that the gaming situation is advantageous to the player. Not only is a visual recognition inhibiting performance such as a confirmed performance performed in a round game different from a specific character performance for a selected character, but it is also avoided that these visual recognition inhibiting performances are performed simultaneously or in the same round game. Therefore, while the player can fully enjoy the selected character through the specific character performance for the selected character, the player is given the opportunity to execute the visual recognition obstructing performance a plurality of times to clearly show that the game situation is advantageous to the player. Thereby, the player can fully enjoy not only the specific character performance but also the visibility obstructing performance in the jackpot game.

<Step S2912>
In step S2912, the MPU 51 calculates the estimated number of balls in the jackpot game against the cumulative number of balls stored in the RAM 512 in the ball counting process executed in step S2712 of the command determination process in FIG. By adding up, the cumulative number of balls put out at the end of the jackpot game is estimated. The estimated number of balls to be put out is the number of winnings (count number) at which the variable winning hole 316 is closed before the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the variable winning hole 316 elapses, with respect to the number of rounds according to the jackpot type; It is estimated as a value multiplied by the number of game balls paid out (number of prize balls) for the winnings in the variable winning hole 316. For example, when the count is 9 in a 5R jackpot and the number of prize balls for the variable winning hole 316 is 13, the estimated number of balls to be played is 5R x 9C x 13 = 585.

As described above, the specific number of balls displayed is a display for the cumulative number of balls that are played by adding the number of prize balls that hit the variable winning slot 316 in a series of jackpots (successive jackpots) starting from the first hit, for example. The so-called difference ball that is the difference between the number of game balls launched (out ball number) (or not only the number of game balls launched during jackpot games, but also the number of game balls launched in the variable time saving mode that shifts after jackpot games) from the cumulative number of balls released. It is executed as a display for the number of balls, or as a display for the cumulative number of balls put out by adding not only the cumulative number of balls put out for the number of prize balls from the variable winning hole 316 but also the number of prize balls from other winning holes such as the general winning hole 313. It is possible that

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the round game performance of the jackpot game is fixed to one round of specific character performance for the selected character (steps S2804 to S2806 in FIG. 33), and then the cumulative number of balls to be played is determined. By estimating the round game in which the number of balls will shift, the execution round of the specific number of balls display performance as the visibility obstructing performance is determined after the second round that avoids the execution round of the specific character performance (steps S2913 to S2916 described later). .

However, the number of game balls launched (number of out balls) and the number of prize balls from other winning holes are likely to vary, and it is difficult to estimate them in advance. ) It is difficult to accurately estimate a round game in which the number of balls that come out is a certain number or more, taking into consideration the number of prize balls from other winning holes. Therefore, in this step S2912, the number of prize balls for winning into the variable winning hole 316, which does not require consideration of the number of game balls launched (number of out balls) and the number of prize balls from other winning holes, is used as the cumulative number of balls put out. Estimated as the number of balls that are added. In the present embodiment, the specific number of balls put out display performance is executed based on the cumulative number of balls put out, which is the sum of the number of prize balls for winnings in the variable winning hole 316.

<Step S2913>
In step S2913, the MPU 51 determines whether the estimated cumulative number of balls released in step S2912 exceeds an unreached specific number among a plurality of predetermined specific numbers. For example, if the specific number is set to a positive integer multiple of 1000, which is the minimum specific number, and the cumulative number of balls stored in the RAM 512 at the start of the jackpot game is 1794, the cumulative number of balls released at the end of the jackpot game. is 2379 (1794 + 585), so the MPU 51 determines that the estimated cumulative number of balls in the current jackpot game exceeds the specific number. On the other hand, for example, in the case of a 5R jackpot, if the cumulative number of balls stored in the RAM 512 at the start of the jackpot game is 1170, the estimated number of balls put out is 1755 (1170 + 5R x 9C x 13). In such a case, the MPU 51 determines that the estimated cumulative number of balls released does not exceed a specific number.

Here, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2914 if the estimated cumulative number of balls to be rolled out exceeds a specific number (step S2913: Yes), and if the estimated cumulative number of balls to be rolled out does not exceed the specific number (step S2913: No). , the visual recognition obstructing effect determination process ends.

<Step S2914>
When the estimated cumulative number of balls to be played exceeds the specific number (step S2913: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the number of round games exceeding the specific number is one round (step S2914). For example, in the estimation example of step S2912, the cumulative number of balls put out is 2002 (1794 + 208) when 16 game balls are won in the variable winning hole 316 (16C x 13 = 208), so 2 rounds It can be estimated that 7C exceeds the specified number of 2000 pieces. In such a case, the MPU 51 estimates that there are two rounds in which the estimated cumulative number of balls released exceeds a specific number (specific number balls displayed round).

In addition, in the case of a 5R jackpot, round games where the cumulative number of balls rolled out exceeds a specific number (specific number balls displayed round) are usually played once if the specific number is set to a positive integer multiple of 1000. be. On the other hand, in the case of a 16R jackpot, the estimated number of balls that will be rolled out in a jackpot game may exceed 1000 (for example, 16R x 9C x 13 = 1872), so the estimated cumulative number of balls that will be rolled out will exceed the specific number. A round game that exceeds the number of balls (a specific number of balls displayed round) can become two rounds. For example, if the cumulative number of balls stored is 1794, in addition to the two rounds mentioned above, the estimated number of balls played at the end of the round is 3081 (1794 + 117 (= number of balls played for 1R = 9C x 13) )×11), which is the 11th round, is also estimated as a round in which the estimated cumulative number of balls released exceeds a specific number.

Here, if the number of round games in which the estimated cumulative number of balls played exceeds a specific number is one round (step S2914: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2915, If the game is not played in one round (step S2914: No), the visual recognition inhibiting effect determination process is ended.

<Step S2915>
If the number of round games in which the estimated cumulative number of balls played exceeds the specific number is one round (step S2914: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the specific number of balls played display flag for the second round to ON (step S2915), and The performance determination process ends. This specific number of balls out display flag is a flag indicating whether it is a round game in which a specific number of balls out is displayed, and the specific number of balls out display is executed in a round game that is set to on. That is, when the flag for displaying the specific number of balls to be rolled out for the second round is set to ON in step S2915, the display for the specific number of balls to be rolled out is executed in the second round. The specific number of balls released display flag is referred to in step S3301 in the ball output display process of FIG. 45, which will be described later.

<Step S2916>
If there is not one round of a round game in which the estimated cumulative number of balls to be played exceeds a specific number (step S2914: No), the MPU 51 turns on the specific number of balls to be displayed flag corresponding to the round game in which the estimated cumulative number of balls to be played exceeds a specific number. (step S2916), and the visual recognition inhibition effect determination process ends.

[Error handling]
Here, FIGS. 41 and 42 are flowcharts showing an example of the error processing procedure executed in step S1910 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in FIG. 19. In the error processing, a process is executed to display an error on the symbol display section 341 when an error has occurred. For example, when an error occurs during execution of the opening/closing execution mode performance in a jackpot game, the display screen changes from the round game performance screen 81, an example of which is shown in FIG. 43(A), to the error occurrence, an example of which is shown in FIG. 43(B). The screen moves to an image display screen 87 (priority display image screen). This error occurrence image display screen 87 notifies that an error has occurred and also informs the type of error, and in the example of FIG. 43(B), it indicates that a magnet detection error has occurred. An error occurrence image 871 (priority display image) is displayed. In addition, the error occurrence image display screen 87 is a screen in which an error display image is superimposed as an overlay image of a screen such as the round game production screen 81, for example, and when an error is displayed during execution of a specific character production, a specific Visual recognition of character production is obstructed. Note that when moving to the error occurrence image display screen 87, the error display may be performed without displaying the specific character effect as a layer below the error display. On the other hand, when the error is resolved, the display screen changes from the error occurrence image display screen 87, an example of which is shown in FIG. 43(B), to the round game presentation screen 81, an example of which is shown in FIG. 43(A), etc., contrary to the case where the error occurred. The display screen will return to the one that corresponds to the gaming status after the error is cleared.

Furthermore, in the error processing of the present embodiment, when the visual recognition of a specific character performance for the selected character is obstructed due to an error display during a jackpot game, for example, when an error display is made during execution of a specific character performance, If a specific character effect is executed as a layer below the error display while the display is being executed, or if the execution of the specific character effect is canceled because the error display is being executed, the specific character effect will be displayed after the error display is canceled. Enables performance to be performed.

By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is one in which effects are performed on characters in a round game in a jackpot game as described above. Furthermore, in general, when an error occurs in a gaming machine, the occurrence of the error is notified through a speaker or a symbol display section, for example. On the other hand, errors include normal errors that do not require an immediate notification after an error occurs, such as the ball jamming error, as mentioned above, as well as fraud detection that requires an immediate notification after an error occurs, such as a magnet detection error. There is an error.

However, error notification is also performed in jackpot games, and for example, an error image indicating that an error has occurred is displayed on the symbol display section. Therefore, in a jackpot game, for example, by displaying an error in response to a fraud detection error that needs to be notified immediately after an error occurs, the timing of executing the performance for the player's favorite character and the timing of displaying the error image can be changed. May overlap. In this case, visual recognition of the performance of the favorite character is obstructed by the fraud detection error display. Further, sensors for detecting fraud, such as the magnet sensor 35, radio wave sensor 36, vibration detection sensor, etc., may operate due to false detection even when no fraud is actually being committed. Therefore, even in a situation where the game is being played properly, the display of the fraud detection error obstructs the visual recognition of the performance of the favorite character. Furthermore, in addition to displaying fraud detection errors, the display timing of the priority display image, which notifies information that needs to be displayed with priority over the character performance, overlaps with the execution timing of the character performance. visibility may be obstructed. When such a situation occurs, the player cannot fully enjoy the performance of his or her favorite character.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, while the priority display image such as the error occurrence image 871 is being displayed on the symbol display section 341, it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the specific character performance. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, it is possible to determine whether visual recognition of the specific character performance is obstructed by the priority display image. This makes it possible to compensate when the priority display image obstructs the visibility of the specific character performance. For example, if the priority display image obstructs the visibility of a specific character performance, and the error is resolved and the display of the priority display image ends, the obstructed specific character performance is executed after the priority display image finishes displaying. It becomes possible to respond to such things. Thereby, even if the priority display image such as the error occurrence image 871 obstructs the visibility of the specific character effect, the player can fully enjoy the specific character effect in the jackpot game.

In the following, a case will be explained with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42 in which the error occurrence image 871 obstructs the visual recognition of a specific character performance. The technical idea can be applied not only to the error occurrence image 871 but also to a wide range of cases where the display timing of a priority display image that displays information that needs to be displayed in priority over the character performance overlaps with the execution timing of the character performance. .

<Step S3001>
Returning to the description of FIG. 41, in step S3001, the MPU 51 determines whether the error occurrence flag that is set to on in step S2720 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to on. If the error occurrence flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3002, and if the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (step S3001: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3002. The process moves to S3007.

<Step S3002 to Step S3004>
In step S3002, the MPU 51 executes error display processing to superimpose and display an error display image as an overlay image on the display screen at the time of error occurrence, further sets an error display flag to on (step S3003), and The flag is set to off (step S3004). Note that the error display flag indicates whether an error is being displayed, and is referenced in step S3008 of the error processing.

<Step S3005>
In step S3005, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is one round of the open/close execution mode, that is, whether or not a specific character performance is being executed as a round game performance of the open/close execution mode in the jackpot game. The judgment as to whether it is one round of the opening/closing execution mode can be made based on the number of rounds stored in the RAM 512 when the round game performance start flag is set to on in step S2712 in the command determination process of FIG. 30, for example. . If the MPU 51 is in the first round of the opening/closing execution mode (step S3005: Yes), that is, if the specific character performance is being executed when the error occurs, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3006. On the other hand, if it is not the first round of the opening/closing execution mode (step S3005: NO), that is, if the specific character performance is not being executed when the error occurs, the MPU 51 ends the error processing.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 51 sets the specific character performance carryover execution flag if it is the first round of the opening/closing execution mode (step S3005: Yes), that is, if the execution is performed with an error display at a timing when visual recognition of the specific character performance is obstructed. Set to on. The specific character performance carryover execution flag indicates that the visibility of the specific character performance is obstructed by an error display. Based on this specific character performance carryover execution flag, the MPU 51 determines whether the specific character performance is obstructed from visibility due to an error display. If the specific character performance is inhibited, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to execute the specific character performance after the error display is canceled.

In this embodiment, regardless of the type of error, an error display is performed on the symbol display section 341 when an error occurs, and when the error display is executed at a timing when visual recognition of a specific character performance is obstructed, a specific character Performance carryover execution is set to on. However, if an error display is executed at a timing that obstructs the visibility of a specific character production, or if an error that requires urgency to be notified, such as a fraud detection error, is displayed, an error display is performed, but a normal error When an error that does not require urgency occurs, such as an error that does not require an emergency, the error display may not be displayed immediately after the error occurs. In this case, if the non-urgent error, such as a normal error, has been resolved by the time the specific character performance is completed, there is no need to display the error again. Furthermore, if a non-urgent error such as a normal error has not been resolved at the stage where the specific character presentation has ended, error display may be started after the specific character presentation has ended. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition of the specific character performance from being obstructed due to the occurrence of a minor error that does not require any urgency.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, if the error occurrence flag is set to off (step S3001: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the error resolution flag, which is set to on in step S2722 in the command determination process of FIG. 30, is set to on. Decide whether or not. If the error resolution flag is set to ON (step S3007: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3010 of FIG. 42, and if the error resolution flag is set to OFF (step S3007: NO), The process moves to step S3008.

<Step S3008>
In step S3008, if both the error occurrence flag and the error resolution flag are set to OFF (No in both steps S3001 and S3007), the MPU 51 sets the error display flag indicating whether an error is being displayed to ON. Determine whether or not there is. If the error display flag is set to ON (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3009, and if the error display flag is set to OFF (step S3008: NO), the MPU 51 performs the error processing. end.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific character performance carryover execution flag is set to on, and if the specific character performance carryover execution flag is set to on (step S3009: Yes), the MPU 51 processes the error. end. On the other hand, if the specific character effect carryover execution flag is set to OFF (step S3009: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3005. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether execution of the specific character effect has been started during the error display. As a result, even if visual recognition of the specific character effect is obstructed by starting execution of the specific character effect while an error is being displayed (while an error is occurring), the MPU 51 will be able to display the specific character after the error display is canceled. It becomes possible to perform the performance.

<Steps S3010 to S3012>
If the error cancellation flag is set to on (step S3007: Yes), in step S3010 shown in FIG. 42, the MPU 51 cancels the error display, further sets the error display flag to off (step S3011), The error resolution flag is set to OFF (step S3012).

<Step S3013>
In step S3013, the MPU 51 determines whether the specific character effect carryover execution flag set to on in step S3006 of FIG. 41 is set to on. If the specific character performance carryover execution flag is set to ON (step S3013: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to S3014. On the other hand, if the specific character performance carryover execution flag is set to OFF (S3013: No), the MPU 51 ends the error processing without executing the specific character performance.

<Steps S3014 and S3015>
In step S3014, the MPU 51 sets the specific character performance carryover execution flag to OFF, and further determines whether the round game performance execution flag, which is set to ON in step S3402 in the round game performance process of FIG. 46, which will be described later, is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3015). The round game performance execution flag indicates whether a round game performance is being executed, and based on this round game performance execution flag, it can be determined whether or not it is in the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, if the round game performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3015: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3016, and if the round game performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S3015: :No), the error processing ends. That is, even if the specific character performance carryover execution flag is set to ON, the MPU 51 executes the ending performance even when the jackpot game has ended or when the jackpot game has not ended. In this case, the error processing is ended without executing the specific character effect.

<Step S3016>
In step S3016, the MPU 51 determines whether there are any unplayed round games after the error is cleared. The determination as to whether there is an unused round game can be made based on the number of rounds stored in the RAM 512, for example, when the round game start effect flag is turned on in step S2710 in the command determination process of FIG. can. If there is an unused round game (step S3016: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3017, and if there is no unplayed round game (step S3016: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3018. .

<Steps S3017 and S3018>
In step S3017, if there is an unused round game (step S3016: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a specific character performance in the RAM 512 as a round game performance for the round game scheduled to be executed next (rewrites the round game performance). ) and end the error handling.

On the other hand, in step S3018, if there is no unplayed round game (step S3016: No), the MPU 51 can determine that the error has been cleared in the final round game and the specific character performance can be executed in the ending. The ending performance is reset to execute a specific character performance in at least a part of the ending, and the error processing is ended.

In this way, in steps S3017 and S3018, it is determined to execute the specific character performance if there is an unplayed round game after the error is cleared or if the ending performance is not executed. Therefore, by making it possible to execute a specific character production in a time shorter than the time taken for one round + interval after the error is cleared, it is possible to execute a specific character production in a short time after the error is cleared. Become.

Here, when resetting the ending effect to execute a specific character effect, the MPU 51 selects, as the specific character effect, any character effect that is the same as the specific character effect whose visibility was inhibited by the error display or a different character effect. You may decide to execute it. In addition, when deciding to execute a character performance that is different from the specific character performance whose visibility has been obstructed by an error display, the MPU 51 is configured to perform an ending performance that is not executed in a character performance normally executed in a variable game performance or a jackpot game performance. It may be determined to perform a specialized specific character presentation or a special specific character presentation that has a lower selection rate than other specific character presentations. As a special specific character presentation, for example, it is possible to display an image of a selected character in a special costume or pose. In this way, even if the visibility of a specific character performance is obstructed by performing a rare performance or a premium performance for a specific character as compensation for the obstruction of visibility of a specific character performance, It becomes possible to reduce feelings such as irritation and dissatisfaction among players by executing special specific character performances.

In addition, in the error processing shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, it was decided to execute the specific character performance if there is an unplayed round game after the error is cleared or if the ending performance is not executed. In addition to this condition, a lottery may be used to determine whether or not to perform a specific character performance after the error is cleared. In this case, for example, a lottery may be held before executing step S3016, or before the specific character effect carryover execution flag is set to on in step S3006, it may be determined by a lottery whether to set this flag to on. , it may be determined whether or not to perform a specific character performance by lottery. When determining whether to perform a specific character performance by lottery, there are cases in which the specific character performance is executed and cases in which it is not performed even if visual recognition of the specific character performance is obstructed by the error occurrence image 871. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise by executing the specific character performance after the display of the error occurrence image 871 is canceled, and to improve the interest of the jackpot game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned error processing, if the error display period overlaps with the execution period of a specific character performance, that is, an error occurs while one round is being executed as a round game, or the execution of one round is started while an error occurs. In this case, a specific character effect is executed after the error is cleared. However, if the overlapping period between the error display period and the execution period of the specific character performance is short, for example, the overlapping period is the maximum execution period per round of the specific character performance (maximum opening time of the variable prize opening 316 (for example, 30 seconds)) If it is 10% or less, it is considered that the player is enjoying the specific character performance for a considerable period of time. Therefore, if the overlapping period between the error display period and the specific character performance execution period is short, the specific character performance may not be performed after the error is cleared.

In the error processing of this embodiment, while the error occurrence image 871 is displayed on the symbol display section 341, by determining whether it is the timing to execute a specific character production, the specific character production can be visually recognized by the error occurrence image 871. You can understand if you are being hindered. This makes it possible to compensate when the error image 871 obstructs the visual recognition of the specific character performance. For example, in this embodiment, when the error occurrence image 871 obstructs the visual recognition of a specific character performance, when the error is resolved and the display of the error occurrence image 871 is canceled, the obstructed specific character performance is canceled due to the error. A visual obstructing effect will be performed during the subsequent unused round game and ending. Thereby, even if the priority display image obstructs the visibility of the specific character effect, the player can fully enjoy the specific character effect in the jackpot game.

In the above, a case has been described in which the error occurrence image 871 obstructs the visibility of a specific character performance, but priority display images other than the error occurrence image 871 that notify information that needs to be displayed with priority over the character performance A similar effect can be obtained even when the display timing overlaps with the execution timing of the character presentation.

[Jackpot game performance processing]
Here, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game production process executed in step S1912 of the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 19. In the jackpot game performance process, the opening performance, ending performance, opening/closing execution mode performance, etc. determined in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 33 are executed.

<Step S3201>
In step S3201, the MPU 51 executes a ball number display process to display on the symbol display section 341 that the cumulative number of balls released is a specific number or more. Note that the details of the process of displaying the number of balls put out will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game performance start flag set to on in step S2708 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to on, and if the jackpot game performance start flag is on ( Step S3202: Yes), the process moves to Step S3203, and when the jackpot game production start flag is off (Step S3202: No), the process moves to Step S3207.

<Step S3203>
If the jackpot game performance start flag is on (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state is a so-called first win (step S3203). Here, the first hit is, for example, a jackpot when the lottery result in a jackpot game lottery in a normal non-time-saving gaming state (low probability mode, not high-frequency support mode) is a jackpot. Then, when the jackpot is the first hit (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3204, and when the jackpot is not the first hit (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
If the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is the first win (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first specific number in the RAM 512 (step S3204). Here, the first specific number is the minimum specific number when displaying the specific number of balls, and is set to 1000, for example. Of course, the first specific number (minimum specific number) is not limited to 1000, and may be other numbers such as 500 or 2000.

<Steps S3205 and S3206>
The MPU 51 sets the jackpot game performance start flag to OFF (step S3205), executes the opening performance start process (step S3206), and ends the jackpot game performance process. In the opening performance start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27 to execute the audio performance and lamp performance as the opening performance determined in step S2803 in FIG. A command is sent to cause the symbol display section 341 to execute an image effect.

<Step S3207>
If the jackpot game performance start flag is off (step S3202: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the round game performance start flag, which is set to on in step S2710 of the command determination process in FIG. 30, is set to on. (Step S3207), if the round game production start flag is on (Step S3207: Yes), the process moves to Step S3208, and if the round game production start flag is off (Step S3207: No), the process moves to Step S3212. to move to.

<Step S3208>
In step S3208, the MPU 51 determines whether the round game is one round. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to end the opening performance. The determination as to whether the round game is one round can be made based on the number of rounds stored in the RAM 512 when the round game performance start flag is turned on in step S2710 in the command determination process of FIG. 30, for example. . If the round is one round (step S3208: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3209, and if the round is not one round (step S3208: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3210.

<Step S3209>
If the round is one round (step S3208: Yes), the MPU 51 executes opening performance end processing (step S3209). That is, the MPU 51 executes the opening performance end process when the round game start flag is turned on during the execution of the opening performance.

<Steps S3210 and S3211>
In step S3210, the MPU 51 sets the round game performance start flag to OFF, further executes the round game performance (step S3211), and ends the jackpot game performance process. That is, the MPU 51 starts the round game performance corresponding to the round game among the opening/closing execution mode performances determined in step S2806 in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 33. In addition, when it is determined in step S2808 in the jackpot game performance determination process in FIG. 33 to execute at least one of the promotion performance and the held consecutive winnings confirmation performance, which are visibility obstructing performances, in the round game, the MPU 51 Execute the visual obstructing effect. The details of the round game performance will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

<Step S3212>
In step S3212, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending start flag set to on in step S2714 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to on, and if the ending start flag is on (step S3212: Yes). ), the process moves to step S3213, and if the ending start flag is off (step S3212: No), the process moves to step S3215.

<Steps S3213 and S3214>
If the ending start flag is on (step S3212: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending start flag to off (step S3213), executes the ending effect start process (step S3214), and ends the jackpot game effect process. do. In the ending performance start process, the MPU 51 causes the performance means such as the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the symbol display section 341 to start the ending performance determined in step S2807 of the jackpot game performance determination process in FIG. Further, when the ending performance is reset in step S3018 in the error processing of FIG. 42, the ending performance reset in the error processing is executed instead of the ending performance determined in the jackpot game performance determination process.

The MPU 51 causes the symbol display section 341 to display images related to balls released, such as the number of balls released in the jackpot game and the total number of balls released during consecutive games, as an ending performance. Furthermore, the ending effect may be one that displays a confirmed image or the like that clearly indicates that the pending consecutive games will be executed. These images are determined, for example, in step S3214. In addition, when executing the held consecutive winnings confirmation performance in the ending performance, the MPU 51 displays the held consecutive winnings confirmed image on the symbol display section 341 before the start of the ending performance, in addition to the held consecutive winnings confirmation performance as the visibility obstructing performance. The display and output of a pending consecutive game confirmation sound from the speaker 26 are determined.

<Step S3215>
In step S3215, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game performance end flag set to on in step S2716 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to on, and if the jackpot game performance end flag is on ( Step S3215: Yes), the process moves to Step S3216, and if the jackpot game performance end flag is off (Step S3215: No), the jackpot game performance process is ended.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
If the jackpot game performance end flag is on (step S3215: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game performance end flag to OFF (step S3216), executes the ending performance end process (step S3217), and executes the jackpot game performance end flag. Finish the production process.

[Ball display performance processing]
Here, FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ball display effect processing executed in step S3201 of the jackpot game effect processing of FIG. 44. In the ball output display processing, when the cumulative number of balls that are put out due to winning in the variable winning hole 316 in a jackpot game exceeds a specific number, a specific number of balls that are put out to notify that the cumulative number of balls that are put out has exceeded the specific number. Perform display effects. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is expected that a specific number of balls will be displayed in one round in which a specific character effect is performed for the selected character, a process of displaying a specific number of balls in two rounds is executed. do.

By the way, in conventional gaming machines, as mentioned above, an overlay image that notifies you that the result of a promotion effect or that a pending consecutive win is confirmed is displayed on the symbol display section, which obstructs the visibility of the effect for the character. Ru. Here, examples of the overlay image include a ball display image that is displayed on the symbol display section every time a certain number of game balls are acquired in a jackpot game. This ball output display image is displayed every time the number of acquired game balls exceeds a certain number, so the ball output display image is displayed at the timing when the player's favorite character is being performed. This may obstruct the visibility of your favorite character's performance. When such a situation occurs, the player cannot fully enjoy the performance of his or her favorite character.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is expected that the ball payout display will be performed in one round in which the specific character performance for the selected character is performed, the ball payout display will be displayed in two rounds. The processing to be performed is executed. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the specific character image effect in the jackpot game without being obstructed by the ball payout display from viewing the specific character image effect for the selected character.

<Step S3301>
In step S3301, the MPU 51 determines whether the specific number of balls displayed flag set to on in step S2915 or S2916 of the visual recognition inhibition effect determination process in FIG. 36 is set to on for the round game. do. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not this corresponds to a round game in which a specific number of balls display performance is executed. Here, if the specific number of balls displayed flag is set to ON for the round game (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3302, and the specific number of balls displayed flag is set to OFF. (Step S3301: Yes), the process moves to Step S3306.

<Step S3302>
In step S3302, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the cumulative number of released balls counted in the released ball counting process of step S2712 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is equal to or greater than a specific number. Here, the specific number is, for example, an integral multiple of 1000. If the cumulative number of balls put out is equal to or greater than a specific number (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3303, and if the cumulative number of balls put out is less than a specific number (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 displays the ball put out. Finish the production process.

<Steps S3303 to 3305>
In step S3303, the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the round game production screen 81 (see FIG. 40(A)) to the specific number of balls displayed image display screen 86 (see FIG. (See (B)), and further sets the specific number of balls output display image display screen flag to ON (step S3304), and also turns off the specific number of balls output display flag that was set to ON for the round game. setting (step S3305), and ends the ball display effect processing. This specific number of balls released display image display screen flag is a flag indicating whether a specific number of balls released image is being displayed (whether a specific number of balls released image effect is being executed). Moreover, when the specific number of balls output display image display screen flag is set to ON in step S3304, time measurement of the time after the flag is turned ON is started.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific number of balls output display image display screen flag set to on in step S3304 is set to on, and the specific number of balls output display image display screen flag is set to on. (Step S3306: Yes), the process moves to Step S3307, and if the specific number of balls output display image display screen flag is set to off (Step S3306: No), the corresponding ball output display effect processing is performed. finish.

<Step S3307>
In step S3307, the MPU 51 waits for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second to 10 (seconds) have elapsed. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the ball display performance has been executed for a predetermined period of time (whether the specific number of balls display image has been displayed for a predetermined period of time). If a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the transition to the specific number of balls displayed image display screen (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3308, and from the transition to the specific number of balls displayed image display screen. If the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S3308: No), the ball display effect processing is ended.

<Steps S3308 and S3309>
In step S3308, if a predetermined period of time has passed since the transition to the specific number of balls displayed image display screen (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the specific number of balls displayed image display screen 86 to round game production. The screen 81 (see FIGS. 40(B) and 40(C)) is returned to, and the specific number of balls displayed image display screen flag is set to OFF (step S3309), and the ball released display effect process is ended.

[Round game performance processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the round game performance process executed in step S3211 of the jackpot game performance process in FIG. In the round game performance process, the round game performance in the opening/closing execution mode performance determined in step S2806 in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 33 and the visibility inhibition performance determined in step S2808 are executed in the round game.

<Steps S3401 and S3402>
In step S3401, the MPU 51 executes the round game performance of the corresponding round, and further sets the round game performance execution flag to ON (step S3402). The round game performance execution flag indicates whether the round game performance is being executed (whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode), and it is determined whether the round game performance is in the opening/closing execution mode in step S3015 in the error processing of FIG. Referenced for.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
In step S3403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the execution round of the promotion effect set in the RAM 512 in step S2906 of the visual recognition inhibition effect determination process in FIG. If it is a promotion performance execution round (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the promotion performance (step S3404) and then ends the round game performance processing. Here, the promotion effect is executed when the round game effect start flag is on (step S3207 in FIG. 44: Yes), that is, at the start of the round game, but the promotion effect may be executed at other timings. . For example, the promotion effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the round game, or may be executed during an interval. If the visibility obstructing performance is executed during the interval, it is possible to avoid the overlap between the execution timing of the specific character performance executed in the round game and the visibility obstructing performance, and the specific character performance is the visibility inhibiting performance. It is possible to prevent visual recognition from being obstructed by

On the other hand, if it is not the promotion effect execution round (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to S3405 without executing the promotion effect.

<Steps S3405 and S3406>
In step S3405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is an execution round of the pending consecutive game confirmation effect set in the RAM 512 in step S2911 of the visual recognition inhibition effect determination process in FIG. If it is the execution round of the held consecutive game confirmed performance (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the held consecutive game confirmed performance (step S3406), and then ends the round game performance process. Here, similarly to the promotion performance, the held consecutive winnings confirmation performance is executed when the round game performance start flag is on (step S3207 in FIG. 44: Yes), that is, at the start of the round game, but it is executed at other timings. You may perform a hold consecutive winnings confirmation effect with . For example, the held consecutive winnings confirmation performance may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the round game, or may be executed during an interval.

On the other hand, if it is not the execution round of the held consecutive game confirmed performance (step S3405: No), the MPU 51 ends the round game performance processing without executing the held consecutive game confirmed performance.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention, in the jackpot game, the specific character image effect, which is mainly based on the selected character selected by the player, is performed at a different timing from the visibility obstructing effect. A specific round game (fixed to one round in this embodiment) is executed. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the specific character image presentation in the jackpot game without being obstructed from viewing the specific character image presentation.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, a specific character image effect is executed in a specific round such as one round. Therefore, the player can know in advance the round game in which the specific character image performance will be executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from missing the specific character image performance for the selected character by focusing on the variable winning hole 316, for example.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, while the error occurrence image 871 is displayed on the symbol display section 341, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to execute a specific character production, and the specific character production is executed based on the error occurrence image 871. When the error is resolved and the display of the error occurrence image 871 is canceled when the visual recognition of the error image 871 is blocked, the blocked specific character performance is executed after the error display is canceled. Thereby, even if the error occurrence image 871 obstructs the visual recognition of the specific character effect, the player can fully enjoy the specific character effect in the jackpot game.

[Other embodiments]
Other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. Furthermore, in other embodiments described below, descriptions of the same configuration and steps similar to the processing procedure as the gaming machine 10 described in the above-described first embodiment will be omitted. Note that it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the first embodiment described above and other embodiments described below.

[Second embodiment]
In the above-mentioned first embodiment, in a jackpot game, when a specific character performance mainly based on a selected character selected by a player is executed in one round, and a visibility obstructing performance is executed in a round other than the first round. explained. That is, in the first embodiment, in a jackpot game, a specific character performance (selection subject image production) mainly based on the selected character (specific selection subject) selected by the player is executed at a different timing from the visibility obstructing production. An example of this has been explained.

On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it determines the execution timing of a specific character effect and the execution timing of a visibility inhibition effect, and if these execution timings overlap, the execution timing of one of the effects is re-determined. This embodiment differs from the embodiment of .

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when at least a portion of the first timing for executing the specific character effect and the second timing for executing the visibility inhibiting effect overlap, one of the first timing and the second timing is selected. The timing is re-determined to a timing where the first timing and the second timing do not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific character performance from being obstructed from visibility due to the visibility inhibiting performance. Furthermore, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the execution timing of the specific character performance is randomly determined, instead of being fixed to one round, which is a specific unit game, and the specific character performance is executed. Ru. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the symbol display section 341 in order to check the specific character performance, so it is possible to make the user actively appreciate the performance for characters other than the selected character, and to see the merits of characters other than the selected character. You will be given an opportunity to confirm.

The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIGS. 47 and 48 respectively show the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 5R and the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 16R, which are referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of this embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the visual recognition inhibition effect determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of this embodiment.

This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the execution timing of the specific character performance is randomly determined as described above, so the game performance determination process is different from the first embodiment described above. The opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 5R (see FIG. 47) and the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 16R (see FIG. 48) referenced in 49) are different.

As shown in FIG. 47, the opening/closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R of this embodiment is defined so that the selected character can be determined in any of the 1st to 5th rounds. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the opening/closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R of this embodiment is defined so that the selected character can be determined in any of the 1st to 16th rounds.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the visibility inhibiting performance determination process of this embodiment, after tentatively determining a round game in which a promotion performance is executed as a visibility inhibition performance (step S3501), a round game in which a provisionally set promotion performance is executed is determined. If the game does not overlap with the round game in which the specific character performance is executed (step S3502: No), the round game with the temporarily set promotion performance is directly set as the round game in which the promotion performance is executed (step S3503). On the other hand, if the temporarily set round game overlaps with the round game that performs the specific character performance (step S3502: Yes), the round game that performs the promotion performance is provisionally set again (step S3501).

Similarly, after tentatively determining the round game that executes the held consecutive winnings confirmation performance as the visibility inhibiting presentation (step S2907), the round game that executes the temporarily set held consecutive winnings confirmation performance becomes the round game that executes the promotion performance. (Step S2908: No), and if it does not overlap with the round game in which the specific character performance is executed (Step S3504: No), the round game of the temporarily set promotion performance is held as is. (Step S3505). On the other hand, if the temporarily set round game overlaps with the round game that executes the promotion effect or the round game that executes the specific character effect (Yes in step S2908 or S3502), the round game that executes the suspended consecutive game confirmation effect overlaps. Temporary settings are made again (step S2907).

In addition, in this embodiment, if a round game in which a specific number of balls is expected to be exceeded overlaps with a round game in which a specific character effect is executed (step S2912: Yes), the current round game is the final round game. If this is the case (step S3506: Yes), that is, if there is no unplayed round game, a setting is made to display a specific number of balls at the ending (step S3507). On the other hand, if the current round game is not the final round game (step S3506: No), that is, if there is an unused round game, a specific number of balls will be displayed in the next round game of the round game in which the specific character performance is executed. Settings are made for a round game to be executed (step S3508).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a round game in which a promotion performance and a holding consecutive winnings confirmation performance as a visibility inhibition performance and a round game in which a specific character performance is executed is determined to overlap, the visibility inhibition performance is The round game to be executed is re-determined to be a round game that does not overlap with the specific character performance. Further, the ball display performance as the visual recognition obstructing performance is also performed in the next round game or ending after the execution of the specific character performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific character performance from being obstructed from visibility due to the visibility inhibiting performance. In addition, by determining the round game in which a specific character performance is to be performed, and re-determining the round game in which the visibility obstructing performance is to be performed as necessary, the specific character performance is not fixed to a specific round game and is executed. , a loud game in which a specific character performance is randomly determined. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the symbol display section 341 in order to check the specific character performance, so it is possible to actively appreciate the performance for characters other than the selected character, and to see the merits of characters other than the selected character. You will be given an opportunity to confirm.

Note that in this embodiment, the specific character performance is determined first, and then the promotion performance and the held consecutive winnings confirmation performance are randomly determined, but the specific character performance is not executed in the promotion performance and the pending consecutive winnings confirmation performance. The timing may be determined intentionally. For example, a round game in which a specific character performance is not performed may be extracted, and a round game in which a promotion performance or a held consecutive winnings confirmation performance is performed may be determined from among the extracted round games. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the specific character performance from being obstructed from visibility due to the visibility inhibiting performance. In addition, not only does it become unnecessary to determine whether the execution timing of a promotion performance or a held consecutive winnings confirmation performance overlaps with the execution timing of a specific character performance, but it also eliminates the need to re-determine the promotion performance or a pending consecutive winnings confirmation performance. The processing load on the MPU 51 is reduced.

In addition, visual recognition obstructing effects such as promotion effects and hold consecutive winnings confirmation effects are determined first, and then a specific character effect is determined, and if the execution timing of the specific character effect overlaps with the execution timing of the visual recognition obstructing effect, the specific character effect is determined. The execution timing of the character presentation may be determined again. Furthermore, when the current round game is the final round game, the ball output display effect was executed at the ending, but if there is no unused round game, the ball output display effect is not executed at the ending. may be omitted.

[Third embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the specific character effect cannot be visually recognized at all due to an error display (see FIG. 43(B)). On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that an error display is displayed in a visible manner for a specific character performance.

The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the error processing procedure executed by the audio lamp control device, and FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of error display on the symbol display section in the error processing of this embodiment. .

As shown in FIG. 50, in the error processing of this embodiment, when an error occurs (step S3001: Yes), it is determined whether or not a specific character production is being executed (step S3601), and the specific character production is is being executed (step S3601: Yes), the error display image 871 is displayed on the symbol display section 341 (step S3002), and the specific character effect is displayed in a reduced size as shown in FIG. 51 (step S3601: Yes). S3602). Note that there is no particular restriction on the reduction ratio or arrangement of the specific character presentation as long as it does not obstruct the visibility of the specific character presentation.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the error display image 871 is displayed on the symbol display section 341 so that the specific character performance can be visually recognized. That is, the specific character performance is performed in a predetermined partial area of the error display image 871 in a smaller size than the display size before displaying the error display image 871, so that the error display image 871 becomes a pattern display. Even when displayed in the section 341, it is visible. Thereby, even if the error display image 871 is displayed on the symbol display section 341, the player can enjoy the selected character image performance in the jackpot game.

Note that in this embodiment, the specific character performance is executed in a reduced size in a part of the error display image 871, but as shown in FIG. A display image 872 may also be displayed. In the example of FIG. 52, the error display image 872 is displayed at the center of the upper part of the round game performance screen 81, but the position where the error display image 872 is displayed is on the left side as long as it does not obstruct the visibility of the specific character performance. , the right part, the bottom part, the corner part, etc. may be in positions other than those shown in FIG. Furthermore, the size of the error display image 872 is not particularly limited as long as it does not obstruct the visual recognition of the specific character performance.

Here, the errors include normal errors that do not need to be notified immediately after the error occurs, such as the ball jam error as described above. For such normal errors, the urgency to notify the occurrence of the error is lower than for fraud detection errors, so there is no particular problem even if the error display and execution of specific character effects are performed in parallel as in this embodiment. do not have.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which when the visual recognition of the specific character performance is obstructed due to the occurrence of an error, the specific character performance is executed in the jackpot game in which the error occurred after the error is canceled. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the visual recognition of the specific character performance is obstructed due to the occurrence of an error, the specific character performance is executed in the next jackpot game, not in the jackpot game where the error occurred. This embodiment differs from the embodiment of .

The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of this embodiment, and FIG. 54 is an error process executed by the voice lamp control device of this embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the jackpot game performance determination process of this embodiment, when the specific character performance stock flag is on (step S3701: Yes), the timing to execute the specific character performance is determined as the stock performance determination process. Ru. In the error processing shown in FIG. 54, this specific character performance stock flag is used as an opportunity to shift to the previous jackpot game when an error occurs and the visibility of the specific character performance is obstructed (step S3005: Yes). It is set to ON on condition that the judgment result is a probability-variable jackpot (step S3802).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as compensation for the case where the visual recognition of a specific character performance is obstructed due to the display of an error display image on the symbol display section 341 in the previous jackpot game, the visual recognition is performed in the special game. The specific character performance is performed by the amount that is inhibited. Thereby, even if the error display image obstructs the visual recognition of the specific character effect, the player can fully enjoy the selected character image effect in the next jackpot game.

In particular, if the visual recognition of a specific character performance is obstructed by an error display image in a fixed-variable jackpot game, if the specific character performance whose visibility was obstructed is executed in the next jackpot game, the game can be a jackpot game. As a benefit, the selected character image effect corresponding to the obstructed visual recognition will be executed, and the player can enjoy the benefit. Furthermore, by making it a condition that a jackpot game is being executed, it is difficult to say that a benefit is a benefit when the visual recognition of a specific character performance is obstructed by displaying an error display image on the symbol display section 341. This can be prevented from happening sooner.

In addition, in the stock performance determination process in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 53, for example, in one jackpot game, in addition to the specific character performance determined in the jackpot game, a specific character performance executed using the stock is added. It may also be determined to perform the specific character performance two or more times. In that case, the specific character performance determined in the jackpot game and the specific character performance executed with the stock may be determined as different performances from the specific character performance executed with the stock, and the specific character performance performed twice or more One of the performances may be performed during the opening, and the remaining specific character performances may be performed during the round game.

If the specific character performance is determined in this way, if the error display image obstructs the visibility of the specific character performance in the previous jackpot game, the selected character image performance will be replaced with another specific character performance in the jackpot game as compensation. is performed as a different performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling bored with the specific character presentation if the same specific character presentation is performed two or more times. In particular, by performing a specific character performance that is performed as compensation at the opening, compared to the case where the same specific character performance is performed two or more times in multiple round games, the feeling of getting bored with the specific character performance can be reduced. You can effectively suppress hugging. In addition, the player can enjoy compensation for the fact that the visual recognition of a specific character performance is obstructed by the error display image as a privilege that is performed as a performance different from other selected character image performances. You can enjoy it more.

Further, the specific character performance performed by stocking may be performed as a special specific character performance with a low application rate, or as a special specific character performance that is limitedly performed only as a specific character performance during stocking. In this way, as compensation for the fact that the visual recognition of the specific character effect is obstructed, a special specific character effect will be executed in the next jackpot game. Therefore, even if the visual recognition of the specific character performance is obstructed, it is possible to reduce the player's feelings of irritation and dissatisfaction at that time by executing the special specific character performance.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which, in a jackpot game, a specific character performance based on a selected character selected by a player is fixed for one round.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the effect that was executed at a predetermined timing in the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state (in this embodiment, the symbol display section 341 at the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed) This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the performance for the character in the final image game performance (trigger game image performance) that was being executed is performed in at least one of the opening and one round.

By the way, some conventional game machines execute a character presentation in which a static image such as a character introduction image is displayed in addition to a moving image such as a PV (promotion video) of a character appearing in a variable game presentation in a jackpot game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the performance for characters in jackpot games is randomly determined, and the performance character (specific performance-based image performance) that is proactively displayed in the reach performance (specific performance-based image performance) in variable game performance ) was not related. On the other hand, from the player's perspective, he or she may feel a certain amount of attachment to the character in the variable game that triggered the jackpot, and feel a sense of gratitude.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the performance character performance (( A special game (special game) (specific performance-based image performance) is executed in at least one of the opening and one round. Therefore, the performance character performance in the jackpot game is executed in a relatively short time after the end of the variable game, in other words, in a relatively short time after the end of the final image game performance in the variable game. Therefore, the player can enjoy the performance character in the final image game performance even in the jackpot game, with the afterglow of the reach performance in the variable game that triggered the jackpot still remaining. Thereby, the player can enjoy the performance characters even more in the jackpot game.

The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game performance determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 56 is referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 55. A diagram showing an example of a jackpot game character performance data table. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of an opening/closing execution mode performance determination table referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 55.

In the jackpot game performance determination process of this embodiment shown in FIG. 55, before determining the opening performance and the opening/closing execution mode performance (before step S2803), the variable game with respect to the variable game that triggered the shift to the jackpot game is determined. The final image game performance type and the performance character in the final image game performance that were being executed at the timing when the main symbol in the performance was stopped and displayed are specified (step S3901).

Then, the MPU 51 refers to the jackpot game character performance data table shown in FIG. 56 and determines the performance to be performed at the opening (step S2802). Further, the MPU 51 refers to the jackpot game character performance data table shown in FIG. 56 and the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table shown in FIG. 57, and determines the performance to be performed in the opening/closing execution mode (steps S3903 and S3904).

Here, the jackpot game character performance data table shown in FIG. 56 is used to determine the character type to appear in the opening performance of the jackpot game, and also to determine the character type for determining the scenario in the round game performance of the jackpot game. This is referred to by the MPU 51 in steps S3902 and S3904 in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. In this jackpot game character performance data table, the character type to appear in the opening performance and round Character types are defined for determining game performance scenarios. In addition, the character type for determining the round game performance scenario is defined depending on the jackpot type (probable variable jackpot and normal jackpot) and whether or not the reserved consecutive win confirmed performance is executed.

Specifically, in the variable game performance that triggered the jackpot game, if the final image game performance is a super reach performance Y1 to Y5, the opening character is not the performance character in the super reach performance Y1 to Y5, A non-selected character among characters 1 to 4 that is not a selected character is determined. That is, when the final image game performance is a super reach performance Y1 to Y5, at the opening, a performance character performance is not performed for the performance character, and a specific character performance is not performed for the selected character.

On the other hand, when the final image game performance is super reach performance Y1 to Y5, performance characters 5 to 9 in super reach performance Y1 to Y5 are determined as characters for determining the scenario of the round game performance. Here, as shown in FIG. 57, in the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 55, these Performance scenario tables are set individually for characters 1 to 9. In the performance scenario table for any of the characters 1 to 9, a scenario in which the performance characters 5 to 9 in the super reach performances Y1 to Y5 are executed in one round of the round game is determined. For example, when the final image game effect is super reach effect Y1, the effect character effect for character 9 is changed to a round game according to the "performance scenario table for character 9" for character 9, which is the effect character in this super reach effect Y1. A scenario to be executed in one round of production is determined.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 56, when the final image game effect is a special reach effect Z1 to Z5, the opening character may be any of the effect characters 1 to 4 in the special reach effects Z1 to Z5, or characters 1 to 20 ( all) will be determined. That is, when the final image game performance is a super reach performance Y1 to Y5, a performance character performance for the performance character is executed at the opening, and when there are multiple performance characters, a performance character performance in which those characters are displayed is executed. be done.

On the other hand, when the final image game performance is a special reach performance Z1 to Z5, the character used to determine the scenario of the round game performance determines whether the judgment result that triggered the transition to the jackpot game is a probability-variable jackpot. The selected character is determined when the pending consecutive winnings are confirmed, and if it is not a guaranteed strange jackpot and the pending consecutive winnings are not confirmed, it is not the selected character among characters 5 to 9 (other than characters 1 to 4). A non-selected character is determined. That is, when the final image game performance is a super reach performance Y1 to Y5, in the opening/closing execution mode, if a certain variable jackpot or a pending consecutive win is confirmed, the specific character performance for the selected character is one round of the round game. (See Figure 57). In this case, if the performance character and the selected character are the same, the specific character performance will be executed in one round as the performance character performance.

Further, when the final image game performance is normal reach performance X1 to X5, the selected character is determined as the opening character and the character for determining the scenario of the round game performance. On the other hand, in normal reach performances X1 to X5, the selected character is determined as the performance character. That is, when the final image game performance is normal reach performance X1 to X5, in both the opening and one round of the round game, the performance character performance (specific selection character) for the performance character (selected character) in normal reach performance X1 to X5 is executed. In other words, if the final image game performance is normal reach performance X1 to X5, and the performance character and the selected character are the same, the specific character performance (performance character The performance character performance) is executed.

In this way, in this embodiment, the character in the opening performance is determined according to the reach type and the type of performance character in the final image game performance, and the scenario performance in the round game (character performance in one round) is determined. The character to play is determined according to the reach type, performance character type, jackpot type (probable odd jackpot and normal jackpot) in the final image game performance, and whether or not the reserved consecutive winnings are executed. The performance determined in this way is executed by the MPU 51 in the jackpot game. As a result, in this embodiment, the performance character performance for the performance character in the final image game performance is performed in at least one of the opening and one round, and execution is restricted in times other than the opening and the first round. Thereby, the player can enjoy the jackpot game in an appearance that reflects the final image game performance in the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance character performance is performed in at least one of the opening and the first round, and the performance is limited to times other than the opening and the first round. If the game situation is advantageous for the player, such as in the case of a jackpot game, the performance character performance may be exceptionally executed at timings other than the opening and the first round. Thereby, the player can enjoy the performance character performance multiple times as a benefit when the game situation is advantageous.

In addition, when the performance character in the final image game performance and the selected character are the same as in normal reach performances X1 to X5, if the performance character performance is executed in both the opening and 1st round, the opening and 1st round It is conceivable to perform the performance character performance as a different performance. In this case, the player can enjoy different performances for the performance character (selected character) twice, in the opening and in one round.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the round game performance scenario is determined according to the reach type, but the round game performance scenario may be determined regardless of the reach type.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which the trigger game image performance is a final image game performance that is executed at the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed, but it is executed at a timing other than when the main symbol is stopped and displayed. A specific character performance for the character in the trigger game image performance may be performed in at least one of the opening and one round.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the scenario of the round game performance in the opening/closing execution mode is determined based on the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table shown in FIG. 57, but the character for determining the scenario of the round game performance is In the case of a character, the performance scenario (round game performance) in the opening/closing execution mode may be determined based on the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table (see FIGS. 47 and 48) in the second embodiment described above. . In this case, the round game in which the specific character performance for the selected character is performed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined even in rounds other than the first round (from the second round onwards). In other words, when the final image game performance is the normal reach performance X1 to X5 performance, when the performance character is the same as the selected character, the performance character performance (specific character performance) for the performance character (selected character) is This is executed in round games other than the opening and the first round, for example, after the second round. This makes it possible to draw attention to the symbol display section 341 in a round game in order to confirm the performance character performance (specific character performance) for the performance character (selected character), so that characters other than the performance character (selected character) The user can actively enjoy the performance for the character, and is provided with an opportunity to check the quality of characters other than the performance character (selected character). In addition, if the performance character satisfies a condition other than the case where the selected character is the same, for example, if the reach type is a special reach performance, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game will be a probability-variable jackpot. In such a case, the performance character may be executed in the second round or later round game.

[Sixth embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment described above, the character in the opening performance is determined according to the reach type and the performance character type in the final image game performance, and the performance scenario in the round game (character performance in one round) is determined. The character for the game is determined according to the reach type, the performance character type, the jackpot type (probable variable jackpot and normal jackpot) in the final image game performance, and whether or not the reserved consecutive winnings are executed. The case where the performance character performance is performed in at least one of the opening and one round has been described.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the character for the opening performance and the character for determining the performance scenario in the round game (character performance in one round) are defined according to the reach type and the performance character type in the final image game performance. This embodiment is similar to the fifth embodiment described above in that it is the same as the fifth embodiment described above, but not only the character for determining the performance scenario in the round game (character performance in one round) but also the character in the opening performance is It differs from the fifth embodiment described above in that it is defined according to the type of jackpot (probable jackpot and normal jackpot) in the lottery result that triggered the transition to the game.

In this embodiment, in addition to the reach type and performance character type in the final image game performance, the character for the opening performance and the character for determining the performance scenario in the round game (character performance in one round) are used for the jackpot game. It is determined according to the jackpot type in the lottery result that triggered the shift to the jackpot game, and the jackpot game performance thus determined is executed in the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the jackpot game in an appearance that reflects the lottery result (playing state of the jackpot game) for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. For example, when the player is in a variable probability jackpot game state that is more advantageous for the player, if a particular reach effect (in this embodiment, normal reach effects X1 to X5 of the selected character (see FIG. 58)) results in a jackpot, the opening and first round Then, the performance character performance (specific character performance) is executed for the performance character (selected character) of the normal reach performance, which is the final image game performance. Thereby, in the case of an advantageous probability-variable jackpot game, the player can continue to enjoy the performance for the performance character (selected character) in the jackpot game from the final image game performance while leaving the afterglow of the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 58, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot game character performance data table referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of this embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 58, OP performance is an abbreviation for opening performance, and R scenario is an abbreviation for round game performance scenario.

In the jackpot game character performance data table shown in FIG. 58, for example, in normal reach performances X1 to X5, the performance character in the final image game performance of the variable game is the same as the selected character, and this is the trigger for transition to the jackpot game state. If the judgment result for the variable game is a probability-variable jackpot, a specific character performance (performance character performance) for the selected character (performance character) is determined at the opening, and the selected character (performance character performance) is selected as the character for selecting the round game performance scenario. ) is determined. That is, if the performance character in the final image game performance of the variable game is the same as the selected character, the performance character (selected character) in the final variable game will be used in both the opening and 1st round, provided that it is a guaranteed variable jackpot. A performance character performance (specific character performance) for the character is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, neither the performance character nor the selected character is displayed in the opening performance (the specific character performance (performance character performance) is not executed), and the performance character (selected character performance) is displayed as the round game performance scenario. ) is selected.

In addition, in super reach performances Y1 to Y5 and special reach performances Z1 to Z5, if the lottery result for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state is a probability-variable jackpot, the final image game performance at the opening A performance for the character is determined, and a performance scenario for the selected character is selected as a round game performance scenario. On the contrary, when the lottery result for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state is a normal jackpot, the selected character is determined as the character in the opening performance, and the round game performance scenario is determined. A performance character is determined as the character. In this way, by determining the character for the opening performance and the character for determining the performance scenario in the round game (character performance in one round), in this embodiment as well, the performance for the selected character during the opening and one round can be determined. A performance is performed for the performance character in the final image game performance of a variable game, and execution is restricted outside of the opening and one round. This makes it possible for the player to anticipate the type of jackpot and enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to the character of the opening performance and the character of the performance performed in one round while taking into account the type of reach. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance character performance (specific character) is executed in at least one of the opening and one round, and execution is restricted outside of the opening and the first round. For example, when performing a promotion performance, When the game situation is advantageous for the player, such as when a pending series of games is confirmed, the performance character performance may be exceptionally executed at a timing other than the opening and the first round.

In addition, in super reach performances Y1 to Y5 and special reach performances Z1 to Z5, the production character may be the same as the selected character, but if the production character is the same as the selected character, one round of the opening and opening/closing execution modes Performance character performance (specific character performance) is executed in both cases. In this case, it is conceivable that the performance character performance (specific character performance) is performed only in one round of the opening and opening/closing execution modes.

Furthermore, when the lottery result that triggered the shift to the jackpot game is a probability-variable jackpot, the final image game effect may When the performance character and the selected character are the same and the performance character performance is performed in both the opening and the first round, it is conceivable to perform the performance character performance as different performances in the opening and the first round. In this case, the player can enjoy different performances for the performance character (selected character) twice, in the opening and in one round.

Further, in this embodiment, the round game performance scenario is determined according to the reach type, but the round game performance scenario may be determined regardless of the reach type.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which the trigger game image performance is a final image game performance that is executed at the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed, but it is executed at a timing other than when the main symbol is stopped and displayed. A specific character performance for the character in the trigger game image performance may be performed in at least one of the opening and one round.

[Seventh embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, the character in the opening performance and the character for determining the performance scenario in the round game (character performance in one round) are the lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. We have explained the case where it is specified according to the jackpot type (probable variable jackpot and normal jackpot) in the result.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the character in the opening performance and the performance scenario in the round game (character performance in one round) are defined as the jackpot type for the 5R jackpot and the 16R jackpot. This embodiment is different from the embodiment No.6. That is, in this embodiment, the character in the opening performance and the performance scenario in the round game (character performance in one round) are defined according to the number of jackpot rounds.

In this embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment described above, the character for the opening performance and the character for determining the performance scenario for the round game (character performance for one round) are the trigger for transition to the jackpot game. It is defined according to the jackpot type in the lottery result, and the jackpot game performance thus determined is executed in the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the jackpot game in a manner that reflects the lottery result (playing state of the jackpot game) of the variable game that triggered the shift to the jackpot game. For example, in a 16R (probable variable) jackpot game state that is more advantageous for the player, if a particular reach effect (in this embodiment, normal reach effects X1 to X5 of the selected character) results in a jackpot, the player will have a normal reach effect in the opening and 1st round. The performance character (specific character performance) for the performance character performance (selected character) of performances X1 to X5 is executed. Thereby, in the case of an advantageous 16R (probable variable) jackpot game, the player can continue to enjoy the jackpot game from the final image game performance while retaining its aftertaste.

The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 59, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot game character performance data table referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of this embodiment.

In the jackpot game character performance data table shown in FIG. 59, for example, in normal reach performances X1 to X5, when the performance character in the final image game performance of the variable game is the same as the selected character, the trigger for transition to the jackpot game state is If the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R jackpot, a specific character performance (performance character performance) for the selected character (performance character) is determined at the opening, and the selected character (performance character performance) is selected as the character for selecting the round game performance scenario. The performance character) is determined. That is, if the performance character in the final image game performance of the variable game is the same as the selected character, the performance character (selected character) in the final variable game in both the opening and the 1st round, on the condition that it is a 16R jackpot. A performance character performance (specific character performance) for the character is executed. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a 5R jackpot, the performance for the selected character in the opening and the performance character in the final image game performance is not determined, and the selected character (performance character) is used as the character for selecting the round game performance scenario. ) is determined.

In addition, in super reach performances Y1 to Y5 and special reach performances Z1 to Z5, if the lottery result for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state is a 5R jackpot, the final image game performance at the opening A performance for the character is determined, and a performance scenario for the selected character is selected as a round game performance scenario. On the contrary, if the lottery result for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state is a 16R jackpot, the selected character is determined as the character in the opening performance, and the round game performance scenario is determined. A performance character is determined as the character. In this way, by determining the character for the opening performance and the character for determining the scenario performance in the round game (character performance in one round), the performance for the selected character during the opening and the first round can also be determined in this embodiment. The performance for the performance character in the final image game performance of the variable game is executed, and execution is restricted outside of the opening and one round, so that the player can anticipate the type of jackpot. Thereby, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to the characters of the opening and one round while considering the reach type.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance character performance is performed in at least one of the opening and the first round, and the performance is limited to times other than the opening and the first round. If the game situation is advantageous for the player, such as when the game is confirmed, the performance character performance may be exceptionally executed at a timing other than the opening and the first round.

In addition, in super reach performances Y1 to Y5 and special reach performances Z1 to Z5, the production character may be the same as the selected character, but if the production character is the same as the selected character, one round of the opening and opening/closing execution modes Performance character performance (specific character performance) is executed in both cases. In this case, it is conceivable that the performance character performance (specific character performance) is performed only in one round of the opening and opening/closing execution modes.

Furthermore, when the lottery result that triggered the transition to the jackpot game is a 16R jackpot, the final image game effect will When the performance character and the selected character are the same and the performance character performance is performed in both the opening and the first round, it is conceivable to perform the performance character performance as different performances in the opening and the first round. In this case, the player can enjoy different performances for the performance character (selected character) twice, in the opening and in one round.

Further, in this embodiment, the round game performance scenario is determined according to the reach type, but the round game performance scenario may be determined regardless of the reach type.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which the trigger game image performance is a final image game performance that is executed at the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed, but it is executed at a timing other than when the main symbol is stopped and displayed. A specific character performance for the character in the trigger game image performance may be performed in at least one of the opening and one round.

[Eighth embodiment]
In the above-mentioned first embodiment, in the visual recognition obstructing performance of the jackpot game performance determining process, the cumulative number of balls put out is estimated, and the visual recognition inhibiting performance, which is the specific number of balls displayed, is a specific character whose main character is the selected character. We have explained the case where you want to prevent it from being executed while the performance is being executed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by monitoring the cumulative number of balls put out in real time, the number of balls put out is displayed during the execution of a jackpot game, and the specific number of balls put out display performance is prevented from being performed during the execution of a specific character performance. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in this point.

The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 60, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the ball display effect processing executed by the audio lamp control device.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the ball output display effect processing of this embodiment, it is determined whether the ball output display carryover flag, which is set to on in step S4005 described later, is set to on (step S4001). The ball output display carryover flag is a flag that displays a specific number of balls display image after the end of the specific character performance, and when the cumulative number of balls released exceeds a specific number during the execution of the specific character performance (steps S4002 and S4004 (Yes), it is set to on (step S4005).

If the ball output display carryover flag is set to OFF (step S4001: No), the cumulative number of released balls counted in the ball output counting process of step S2712 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is greater than or equal to the Nth specific number. Determine whether or not. Here, N is a positive integer, and for example, the Nth specific number is 1000N.

Here, in the ball output counting process of the first embodiment described above, only the number of prize balls for winning into the variable winning hole 316 was added as the cumulative number of balls played. On the other hand, in the ball counting process of the present embodiment, the number of game balls shot out during a jackpot game (number of out balls) is determined by calculating the cumulative number of balls played in a jackpot game from the cumulative number of balls played for winning in the variable winning hole 316. The so-called difference number of balls is adopted, and when the difference number of balls exceeds a specific number, a specific number of balls out display effect is executed. That is, in this embodiment, when counting the cumulative number of balls played by differentiating the number of game balls launched during a jackpot game (number of out balls), a round game in which the cumulative number of balls played is equal to or greater than a specific number is accurately estimated. Since it is not easy to do so, the cumulative number of balls put out is monitored in real time in consideration of this point, and the number of balls put out is displayed during the execution of the jackpot game.

If the cumulative number of balls put out is equal to or greater than the Nth specific number (step S4002: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4003, and if the cumulative number of balls put out is less than the Nth specific number (step S4002: No), The process moves to step S3306.

When the cumulative number of balls put out is equal to or greater than the Nth specific number (Step S4002: Yes), the specific number set in the RAM 512 is updated from the Nth specific number to the N+1th specific number (Step S4003). That is, the MPU 51 changes the number of balls to be determined in the specific number of balls displayed to the next specific number. Here, the N+1 specific number is, for example, the N-th specific number+1000 (=1000(N+1)).

Next, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a specific character presentation is being executed (step S4004). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the display timing of the specific number of balls displayed image overlaps with the execution timing of the specific character performance.

If the specific character performance is being executed (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ball payout display carryover flag to ON (step S4005), and ends the ball payout display performance process. That is, the MPU 51 carries over the display of the specific number of balls displayed image until the end of the specific character performance by setting the ball output display carryover flag to ON.

On the other hand, if the specific character performance is not being executed (step S4004: No), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen of the symbol display section 341 to the specific number of balls displayed image display screen 86 (see FIG. 40(B)) (step S3903). That is, when the specific character performance is not being executed, the MPU 51 displays a specific number of balls displayed image when the cumulative number of balls released reaches a specific number or more.

On the other hand, if the ball payout display carryover flag is set to on (step S4001: Yes), it is determined whether the specific character performance has ended (step S4006). If the specific character performance has ended (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ball output display carryover flag to OFF (step S4007), and changes the display screen of the symbol display unit 341 to the specific number of balls output display image display screen. 86 (see FIG. 40(B)) (step S3903).

In this embodiment, before executing the specific ball number display effect, which is a visual recognition obstructing effect, it is determined whether a specific character effect is to be executed while the specific number of balls displayed. When it is determined that the specific character performance is to be executed during execution, the specific number of balls displayed performance is executed after the specific character performance is finished. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the visual recognition of the specific character performance being obstructed by the specific ball number display performance.

[Ninth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the jackpot game performance determination process, the visibility inhibition performance is determined after the opening/closing execution mode performance is determined, and the visibility inhibition performance is executed during the execution of the specific character performance in which the selected character is the main character. We have explained how to prevent this from happening.

On the other hand, the present embodiment determines the opening/closing execution mode performance after determining the visibility inhibition performance, and prevents the visibility inhibition performance from being executed during execution of the specific character performance in which the selected character is the main character. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game performance determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of this embodiment, and FIGS. 62 and 63 are respectively referred to in the jackpot game performance determination process of FIG. 61. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 5R, and the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 16R.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the jackpot game performance determination process of the present embodiment, a visibility inhibition performance determination process for determining a visibility inhibition performance is executed (step S4101), and after that, necessary information for determining the opening/closing execution mode performance is executed. Processing is executed (steps S4102 to S4105).

In the visibility inhibition effect determination process (step S4101), unlike the first embodiment described above, the visibility inhibition effect may be determined including one round. However, the round game in which the visibility inhibition performance is executed is determined so that the promotion performance and the held consecutive winnings confirmation performance are not executed in the same round, that is, a plurality of visibility inhibition performances are not executed in the same round.

When determining a round game in which a visual recognition obstructing effect is executed (step S4101), the MPU 51 determines a round game in which a specific character effect is executed for the selected character (step S4102). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines to execute the specific character performance in a round game that does not overlap with the round game in which the visibility inhibition performance is executed, that is, in a round game in which the visibility inhibition performance is not performed. For example, when performing a specific number of balls displayed in the 2nd round, a hold consecutive winnings confirmation effect in the 3rd round, and a promotion effect in the 4th round as visibility obstructing effects, the MPU 51 may select one specific character effect that does not perform the visual obstructing effect. Decide to run in rounds or 5 rounds. Whether the specific character performance will be performed in one round or five rounds is determined by a lottery or the like.

Note that the MPU 51 may decide to execute the specific character effect in one round when the visual recognition inhibition effect is not executed in one round. Further, the specific character performance may be performed in both the opening performance and the opening/closing execution mode performance.

When the MPU 51 determines a round game in which a specific character effect is to be executed (step S4102), the MPU 51 specifies the jackpot type and the selected character (step S4103), and selects a round game in which to execute a specific character effect, in accordance with the jackpot type and the selected character type. Then, an opening/closing execution mode production determination table for determining the production to be executed in each round game in the opening/closing execution mode is determined (step S4104).

Here, FIG. 62 shows a 5R opening/closing execution mode performance determination table, and FIG. 63 shows a 16R opening/closing execution mode performance determination table.

The 5R opening/closing execution mode performance determination table shown in FIG. 62 is a table that is referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the opening/closing execution mode performance at the time of the 5R jackpot. That is, when the jackpot type is a 5R jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the 5R opening/closing execution mode performance using the same opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 5R, regardless of whether it is a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R variable probability jackpot. Of course, different 5R opening/closing execution mode effect determination tables may be prepared for the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R certain variable jackpot, and the 5R opening/closing execution mode effect may be determined based on them.

This opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 5R includes a performance scenario table corresponding to the selected character, and five performance scenario tables, 1R selection performance scenario table to 5R selection performance scenario table, are set for each selected character. has been done. For example, the 1R selection performance scenario table for 5R character 1 is a performance scenario table that is selected when performing a specific character performance for the selected character in 1R, and the 5R selection performance scenario table for 5R character 1 is a performance scenario table that is selected when performing a specific character performance for the selected character in 5R. This is the production scenario table selected in . For example, if the round game in which the specific character performance is executed is one round, the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot, and the selected character is character 1, the MPU 51 sets the opening/closing execution mode performance for 5R as the opening/closing execution mode performance scenario. The "1R selection performance scenario table for 5R character 1" of the determination tables is determined.

Although FIG. 62 only shows the 5R opening/closing execution mode effect determination table for character 1, similarly for characters 2 to 9, there are five different round games in which specific character effects are executed for the selected character. A production scenario table is set. That is, in this embodiment, since any one of characters 1 to 9 can be selected as the selected character, the opening/closing execution mode production determination table for 5R has a total of 5 pieces corresponding to each of characters 1 to 9. Contains 45 performance scenario tables.

The 16R opening/closing execution mode performance determination table shown in FIG. 63 is a table that is referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the opening/closing execution mode performance at the time of the 16R jackpot. The opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 16R includes a performance scenario table corresponding to the selected character, and 16 performance scenario tables from 1R selection performance scenario table to 16R selection performance scenario table are set for each selected character. ing. Although FIG. 63 only shows the 5R opening/closing execution mode effect determination table for character 1, 16 different round games in which the specific character effect is executed for the selected character are similarly shown for characters 2 to 9. A production scenario table is set. That is, in this embodiment, since any one of characters 1 to 9 can be selected as the selected character, the opening/closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R has a total of 16 pieces corresponding to each of characters 1 to 9. Contains 171 performance scenario tables.

In both the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 5R and the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 16R, each performance scenario table includes a performance scenario type, a round game performance character type, and a scenario type counter. The performance scenario type, round game performance character type, and scenario type counter are the same as the 5R opening/closing execution mode performance determination table of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 34, so their explanations are omitted here. do.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 5R and the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table for 16R, the specific character performance for the selected character is always performed once in any round game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the player can always enjoy the specific character performance for the selected character in one jackpot game.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 61, when the MPU 51 determines the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table (step S4104), the MPU 51 determines the performance scenario in the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening/closing execution mode performance determination table determined in step S4104 ( Step S4105).

In this embodiment, after determining a round game in which a visibility inhibiting performance is executed, a round game in which a specific character performance is executed for a selected character is determined, avoiding a round game in which a visibility inhibiting performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid obstructing the visual recognition of the specific character performance due to the visibility inhibiting performance.

Further, in this embodiment, the specific character performance is performed once in any round of the round game. Therefore,

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific character performance is always performed once in any round game in the opening/closing execution mode, but if the game situation is advantageous to the player, for example, if a pending consecutive game is confirmed. , when the next jackpot is scheduled to be executed relatively, such as in the case of a guaranteed variable jackpot, in a jackpot game where the gaming situation is advantageous for such a player, a specific character performance is executed. You may choose not to do so. Thereby, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to whether the specific character performance is executed in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode. Note that if the specific character performance is not performed in the jackpot game because the game situation is advantageous to the player, the specific character performance may be performed multiple times in the next jackpot game. For example, a specific character performance may be performed in all round games in the opening/closing execution mode, or in addition to all round games in the opening/closing execution mode, a specific character performance may be performed in at least one of the opening and ending. It may also be executed. Thereby, if the specific character performance was not executed in the previous jackpot game, the player can enjoy the specific character performance in the current jackpot game up to the extent of the previous jackpot game. In addition, regarding the execution of specific character performances in all round games in the opening/closing execution mode, the condition is that the game situation is advantageous for the player, such as when it is a guaranteed strange jackpot or when a pending consecutive win is confirmed. Good too.

[Summary of the invention]
Hereinafter, a summary of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, reference numerals may be added to the description for convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to the specific configuration with the reference numeral. It's not a thing. Furthermore, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
A determining means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the establishment of a determination condition;
main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41);
the special game, and A performance means (341, etc.) by which a game performance (jackpot game performance, variable game performance) is executed in a notification game (variable game) that notifies the determination result;
performance execution means (51) for causing the performance means (341, etc.) to execute the game performance;
Equipped with
The game performance includes, as the game performance executed in the special game, a specific selection subject image production (specific character production) executed in the image display means (341) with the specific selection subject as the subject, and the image display. A visibility inhibiting performance that inhibits the visibility of the performance executed in the means (341),
A gaming machine characterized in that the performance execution means (51) includes means for setting the specific selection subject image performance to be executed at a timing different from the visibility inhibition performance in the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1, in the special game, the specific selection subject image performance for the specific performance subject selected by the player is executed at a different timing from the visibility inhibition performance. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the specific selection subject image performance in the special game without being obstructed from viewing the specific selection subject image production.

[Appendix A2]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that provide game value (game balls) to the player,
The performance execution means (51)
Executing the specific selection-based image production at a first timing set in a first period in which a predetermined specific unit game among the plurality of unit games is executed;
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the visual recognition inhibiting effect is executed at a second timing set in a second period other than the first period in the special game.

[Appendix A3]
The gaming machine according to appendix A2, wherein the first period is a period in which a first unit game (one round) among the plurality of unit games is executed.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the second period is a period in which unit games other than the first unit game among the plurality of unit games are executed.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices A2 to A4, a specific selection-based image performance is executed in a specific unit game such as the first unit game. Therefore, since the player can know in advance the unit game in which a specific selection-based image production is executed, the player can avoid missing a specific selection-based image production, such as a selected character image production, by focusing on the variable prize opening, for example. It can be prevented.

[Appendix A5]
The effect execution means (51), when determining a first timing to execute the specific selection subject image effect and a second timing to execute the visibility inhibition effect, selects at least one of the first timing and the second timing. If the first timing and the second timing partially overlap, one of the first timing and the second timing is re-determined to a timing at which the first timing and the second timing do not overlap, as described in appendix A1. gaming machines.

[Appendix A6]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that provide game value (game balls) to the player,
The game according to appendix A5, wherein the performance determining means (51) determines the first timing and the second timing to be a period in which any one of the plurality of unit games is executed. Machine.

According to the gaming machines according to Appendices A5 and A6, when the first timing for executing the specific selection-based image effect and the second timing for executing the visibility inhibiting effect at least partially overlap, the first timing and the second timing are One of the timings is re-determined to a timing at which the first timing and the second timing do not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific selection subject image performance from being obstructed from viewing by the visibility inhibiting performance. In addition, by determining the first timing to execute the specific selection-based image production and re-determining the first timing as necessary, the specific selection-based image production is not fixed to a specific unit game and executed. , the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect is randomly determined. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the image display means in order to confirm the specific selection subject's image production, so that it is possible to actively appreciate the production for selection subjects other than the specific selection subject, and You will be given an opportunity to check the quality of your selection.

[Appendix A7]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that provide game value (game balls) to the player,
Further comprising a duplication determining means (51) for determining whether or not the specific selection-based image rendering is executed during the execution of the visibility inhibiting rendering before executing the visibility inhibiting rendering;
When the duplication determining means (51) determines that the specific selection-based image presentation is to be executed during the execution of the visibility inhibiting presentation, the presentation execution means (51) is configured to execute the specific selection-based image presentation after the completion of the specific selection-based image presentation. The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the gaming machine executes the visual recognition obstructing effect.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A7, before executing the visibility inhibiting performance, it is determined whether or not the specific selection subject image performance is to be executed during the execution of the visibility inhibiting performance, and the specific selection subject image is displayed during the performance of the visibility inhibiting performance. When it is determined that the effect is to be executed, the visibility obstructing effect is executed after the specific selection subject image effect is finished. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific selection subject image performance from being obstructed from viewing by the visibility inhibiting performance.

[Appendix A8]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games that provide a game value to the player,
The performance execution means is
Executing the specific selection-based image production during a unit game period in which any one of the plurality of unit games is executed;
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the visual recognition inhibiting effect is executed during an interval period between the unit games.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A8, the specific selection subject image performance is performed during the unit game period, while the visibility inhibition performance is performed during the interval period between unit games. Therefore, the execution timing of the specific selection subject image production and the execution timing of the visibility inhibition production can be avoided from overlapping, and the visibility of the specific selection subject image production can be prevented from being inhibited by the visibility inhibition production.

[Appendix A9]
The specific selection-based image rendering is executed by the image display means (341) based on a multilayer image obtained by superimposing a plurality of images,
The visibility inhibition effect is an image in which an information notification image (831, 851, 861, 871, etc.) that notifies predetermined information is displayed on the image display means (341) in a visible layer in the multilayer image. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A8, characterized in that the game machine is a performance.

[Appendix A10]
The information notification image is an image (861 ) The gaming machine according to appendix A9.

[Appendix A11]
The notification gaming state includes a first notification gaming state (low probability mode) and a second notification in which the probability that the determining means (41) determines that the transition to the special gaming state is higher than the first notification gaming state. including a gaming state (high probability mode);
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that transitions to the first notification gaming state after the special game ends, and a transition to the second notification gaming state after the special game ends. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state, a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state),
The gaming machine according to appendix A9 or A8, wherein the information notification image is an image (831) that suggests or clearly indicates that the special gaming state is the second special gaming state.

[Appendix A12]
a reservation means (41) for suspending the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit;
a suspension result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the suspension notification game suspended by the suspension means (41);
Furthermore,
The information notification image includes a judgment result for the reservation notification game stored in the reservation result storage means (412) that causes the game to transition to the special game state after the execution of the reservation notification game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A9 to A11, characterized in that the image (851) suggests or clearly indicates that.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices A9 to A12, it is possible to prevent the specific selection subject image presentation from being obstructed by various information notification images that serve as visual recognition obstructing presentations.

[Appendix A13]
The presentation means (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) movable between a standby position where the display screen of the image display means (341) is covered with a low coverage ratio and an operating position where the coverage ratio is high. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A12, wherein the visibility inhibition performance is a movable member operation performance in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the actuation position.

[Appendix A14]
The notification gaming state includes a first notification gaming state (low probability mode) and a second notification in which the probability that the determining means (41) determines that the transition to the special gaming state is higher than the first notification gaming state. including a gaming state (high probability mode);
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that transitions to the first notification gaming state after the special game ends, and a transition to the second notification gaming state after the special game ends. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state, a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state),
The gaming machine according to appendix A13, wherein the movable member operation performance is a performance that suggests or clearly indicates that the special game state is the second special game state.

[Appendix A15]
a reservation means (41) for suspending the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit;
a suspension result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the suspension notification game suspended by the suspension means (41);
Furthermore,
The movable member actuation effect includes, among the determination results for the reservation notification game stored in the reservation result storage means (412), a transition to the special game state after execution of the reservation notification game. The gaming machine according to appendix A13 or A14, characterized in that the performance suggests or clearly indicates that a player is present.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices A9 to A15, it is possible to prevent the specific selection-based image performance from being obstructed by various performances such as a movable member operation performance, a promotion performance, and a hold consecutive winnings confirmation performance, which are visual recognition obstructing performances. can.

[Appendix B1]
A determining means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the establishment of a determination condition;
main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41);
A specific selection subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by the player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters), and a priority display image (871, 872) includes an image display means (341) on which is displayed, and a performance means for executing a game performance (a jackpot game performance, a variable game performance) in the special game and the notification game (variable game) that notifies the determination result. (341 etc.) and
performance execution means (51) for causing the performance means (341, etc.) to execute the game performance;
Equipped with
The game performance includes a specific selection subject image production (specific character production) executed on the image display means (341) with the specific selection subject as the main character, as the game production executed in the special game,
The execution timing of the specific selection subject image production in the image display means (341) is from the start of display of the priority display image to the end of display of the priority display image in the image display means (341). A gaming machine further comprising performance determining means (51) for determining whether or not.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the priority display image is an abnormality notification image (871, 872) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine.

[Appendix B3]
The effect determining means (51) determines whether the specific selection-based image effect is executed in the image display means (341) at the time when displaying the priority display image is started. The gaming machine according to appendix B1 or B2, wherein the gaming machine determines that it is the execution timing of the specific selection-based image production.

[Appendix B4]
The effect determining means (51) is configured to control the image display when a timing to start execution of the specific selection-based image effect has arrived between the start of display of the priority display image and the end of display of the priority display image. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B3, characterized in that the means (341) determines that it is the timing to execute the specific selection-based image production.

[Appendix B5]
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the priority display image when the effect determination means (51) determines that it is the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect. The gaming machine according to appendix B1 or B4, wherein the specific selection-based image rendering is executed after the game is finished.

[Appendix B6]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that provide game value (game balls) to the player,
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the priority display image when the effect determination means (51) determines that it is the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect. The gaming machine according to appendix B5, characterized in that the specific selection-based image effect is executed in an unexpired unit game among the plurality of unit games that is started after the end point.

[Appendix B7]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that provide game values (game balls) to the player, and an ending that transitions after the end of the plurality of unit games,
The effect execution means (51) is characterized in that when the effect determination means (51) determines that it is the execution timing of the specific selection-based image effect, the effect execution means (51) executes the specific selection-based image effect in the ending. The gaming machine described in appendix B5.

[Appendix B8]
When there is no unused unit game among the plurality of unit games to be started after the end of displaying the priority display image on the image display means (341), the performance execution means (51) The gaming machine according to appendix B7, wherein the specific selection-based image effect is executed in the ending.

According to the gaming machines according to Appendices B1 to B8, the specific selection-based image presentation is performed from when the image display means starts displaying a priority display image such as an abnormality notification image until the display of the priority display image ends. It is determined whether or not it is being executed by the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to ascertain whether the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image presentation is obstructed by the priority display image. This makes it possible to compensate when the priority display image obstructs the visibility of the specific selection subject image effect. For example, if the priority display image obstructs the visibility of a specific selection-based image presentation, and the display of the priority display image is canceled due to the abnormality being resolved, the obstructed specific selection-based image presentation may be changed to the priority display image. After the display is canceled, it becomes possible to take actions such as executing an unused unit game or an ending, for example. Thereby, even if visibility of the specific selection subject image performance is obstructed by the priority display image, the player can fully enjoy the specific selection subject image performance in the special game.

[Appendix B9]
The specific selection subject image production includes a normal specific selection subject image production that has a high probability of being executed by the production execution means (51), and a special specific selection subject image production that has a low probability of being executed by the production execution means (51). and,
The effect executing means (51) is configured to display the priority display image on the image display means (341) when the effect determining means (51) determines that the specific selection subject image effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B5 to B8, wherein the special specific selection-based image rendering is executed after the game is finished.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B9, when a specific selection subject image performance is executed while the priority display image is displayed, after the display of the priority display image is canceled, a special specific selection subject with a low execution probability is used as the specific selection subject image performance. Image rendering is executed. That is, as compensation for the obstruction of visual recognition of the specific selection subject image production, a rare presentation or a premium presentation for the specific selection subject is performed. Therefore, even if the visual recognition of the specific selection-based image performance is obstructed, it is possible to reduce the player's feelings of irritation and dissatisfaction at that time by executing the special specific selection-based image performance.

[Appendix B10]
The effect executing means (51) is configured to display the priority display image on the image display means (341) when the effect determining means (51) determines that the specific selection subject image effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B5 to B9, wherein after the end of the game, it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the specific selection-based image production.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B10, the specific selection subject image effect is executed by winning the lottery when the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is obstructed. That is, even if the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image production is inhibited, there are cases where the specific selection subject image production is executed and cases where the specific selection subject image production is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise by executing the specific selection-based image effect after the display of the priority display image is finished, and to improve the interest of the special game.

[Appendix B11]
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the priority display image so that the specific selection subject image effect can be visually recognized.

[Appendix B12]
The performance execution means (51)
Displaying the priority display image on the entire or substantially entire display screen of the image display means (341),
Supplementary note B11, characterized in that the selection-specific selection-based image rendering is performed in a predetermined partial area of the priority display image by reducing the display size from the display size before displaying the priority display image. The game machine described.

[Appendix B13]
The effect execution means (51) is characterized in that the priority display image is displayed superimposed on the display screen on a part of the display screen of the specific selection subject image effect in the image display means (341). The gaming machine described in appendix B11.

According to the gaming machines according to Appendix B11 to Appendix B13, the priority display image is displayed on the image display means so that the specific selection subject image presentation can be visually recognized. For example, the specific selection subject image rendering is performed in a predetermined partial area of the priority display image in a smaller size than the display size before displaying the priority display image, or the specific selection subject image is displayed on the image display means. By displaying the priority display image superimposed on the display screen in a part of the presentation display screen, the priority display image can be viewed even when it is displayed on the image display means. Thereby, even if the priority display image is displayed on the image display means, the player can enjoy the specific selection subject image effect in the special game.

[Appendix B14]
Execution of a specific selection subject image performance for executing the specific selection subject image performance in the next special game, on the condition that the performance determination means (51) determines that the specific selection subject image performance is being executed. Further comprising a storage means (512) for storing information (specific character performance stock flag),
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the effect execution means (51) executes the specific selection-based image effect when the specific selection-based image effect execution information is stored in the storage means. .

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B14, as compensation in the case where the visibility of the specific selection subject image presentation is obstructed due to the display of the priority display image on the image display means, the compensation for the obstructed visibility in the next special game is provided. A specific selection-based image rendering is executed. As a result, even if the priority display image obstructs the visibility of the specific selection-based image performance, the player can fully enjoy the specific selection-based image performance in the next special game.

[Appendix B15]
The notification gaming state includes a first notification gaming state (low probability mode) and a second notification in which the probability that the determining means (41) determines that the transition to the special gaming state is higher than the first notification gaming state. including a gaming state (high probability mode);
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that transitions to the first notification gaming state after the special game ends, and a transition to the second notification gaming state after the special game ends. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state, a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state),
The gaming machine according to appendix B14, wherein the storage means stores the specific selection subject image performance execution information on the condition that the second special game is being executed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B15, on the condition that the second special game is being executed, if the priority display image obstructs the visibility of the specific selection subject image production, the visibility will be obstructed in the next special game. The specific selection-based image rendering is executed. That is, when it is assumed that the time during which the next special game will be executed is relatively short, the specific selection-based image performance that is obstructed in visual recognition will be executed in the next special game. As a result, as a benefit of being the second special game, the specific selection-based image performance that is obstructed from visual recognition is executed, and the player can enjoy the benefit. Furthermore, by making it a condition that the second special game is being executed, compensation will be provided in the event that the display of the priority display image on the image display means obstructs the visibility of the specific selection subject image production. can be prevented from happening in the first place.

[Appendix B16]
The performance execution means (51) executes the specific selection subject image performance in the special game by executing the specific selection subject image performance based on the specific selection subject image performance execution information stored in the storage means. Supplementary note characterized in that when executed two or more times, the specific selection subject image production executed based on the specific selection subject image production execution information is executed as a production different from the other specific selection subject image productions. The gaming machine described in B14 or Appendix B15.

[Appendix B17]
The special game includes an opening and a plurality of unit games (round games) that transition after the opening ends and provide gaming value (game balls) to the player,
The performance execution means (51) executes the specific selection subject image performance in the special game by executing the specific selection subject image performance based on the specific selection subject image performance execution information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine according to appendix B16, characterized in that, when executed two or more times, the specific selection subject image effect executed based on the specific selection subject image effect execution information is executed at the opening.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B16 and Appendix B17, when the priority display image obstructs the visibility of the specific selection subject image production and the specific selection subject image production is executed two or more times in the next special game, To compensate for this, the specific selection subject image performance that is executed is performed as a performance that is different from other specific selection subject image performances. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling bored with the specific selection subject image production if the same specific selection subject image production is executed two or more times. In particular, by executing a specific selection-based image performance that is executed as compensation at the opening, the specific selection-based image performance is It is possible to effectively suppress the feeling of getting tired of watching. In addition, the player can enjoy compensation for the fact that the visibility of the specific selection-based image performance is obstructed by the priority display image as a privilege that is performed as a performance different from other specific selection-based image effects. , you can enjoy special games even more.

[Appendix B18]
The specific selection subject image production includes a normal specific selection subject image production that has a high probability of being executed by the production execution means (51), and a special specific selection subject image production that has a low probability of being executed by the production execution means (51). and,
The effect executing means (51) executes the special specific selection subject image effect as the specific selection subject image effect executed based on the specific selection subject image effect execution information. The gaming machine according to any one of B17.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B18, if a specific selection subject image performance is executed while the priority display image is displayed, a special specific selection subject image performance with a low execution probability is executed as the specific selection subject image performance in the next special game. executed. That is, as compensation for the fact that the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image performance is obstructed, a rare performance or a premium performance for the specific selection subject is executed in the next special game. Therefore, even if the visual recognition of the specific selection-based image performance is obstructed, it is possible to reduce the player's feelings of irritation and dissatisfaction at that time by executing the special specific selection-based image performance.

[Appendix C1]
A determining means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41);
An image display means (341) in which a notification game image performance (variable game performance) is executed in the notification game that notifies the determination result, and a special game image performance (jackpot game performance) is executed in the special game;
performance execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) to execute the notification game image performance and the special game image performance;
Equipped with
The special game includes an opening and a plurality of unit games (round games) that transition after the opening ends and provide gaming value (game balls) to the player,
The information game image production is an information game specific performance image production (production character such as super reach production, special reach production, etc.) in which a specific production subject (production character) among a plurality of production subjects (characters) is displayed. (direction), including
The special game image performance includes a special game specific performance main image performance (performance character performance) in which the specific performance main character is displayed primarily,
The performance execution means (51) executes the trigger game image performance that was executed at a predetermined timing of the notification game that triggered the transition to the special game state when the special game state is transitioned to the special game state. In the case of a game-specific performance-based image performance, the special game-specific performance-based image performance is performed in at least one of the opening and the first unit game executed first in the plurality of unit games. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the special game specific performance subject image performance for the specific performance subject in the trigger game image performance in the variable game is executed in the special game. Therefore, in the special game, the player can fully enjoy the specific performance main character of the special game specific performance main image performance in the notification game. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special game specific performance-based image performance is executed at the opening of the special game or the first unit game. Therefore, the special game specific performance main image performance is executed in the special game in a relatively short time after the end of the notification game, in other words, in a relatively short time after the end of the trigger game image performance in the notification game. Therefore, the player, while still having the afterglow of the image performance based on the specific performance of the notification game, such as the reach performance in the notification game that triggered the transition to the special game, may You can also enjoy a special game based on a specific performance. Thereby, the player can enjoy the specific performance main character even more in the special game.

[Appendix C2]
The performance execution means (51) executes the special game specific performance main image in at least one of the opening and the first unit game, which is determined according to the type of the specific performance main body in the trigger game image performance. The gaming machine according to appendix C1, which executes a performance.

[Appendix C3]
The plurality of performance subjects include a first performance body belonging to a first performance body group and a second performance body belonging to a second performance body group different from the first performance body group,
The information game specific performance main image performance includes a first notification game specific performance main image performance when the specific performance main body is the first performance main body, and the above-mentioned when the specific performance main body is the second performance main body. A second notification game specific performance main image performance,
The performance execution means (51)
When the specific performance subject in the opportunity game image production is the first performance subject, executing the special game specific performance subject image production at the opening;
The game according to appendix C2, characterized in that when the specific presentation subject in the trigger game image presentation is the second presentation subject, the special game specific presentation subject image presentation is executed in the first unit game. Machine.

[Appendix C4]
The production execution means (51) executes the special game in which some or all of these specific production subjects are proactively displayed when there are a plurality of specific production subjects in the trigger game image production. The gaming machine according to appendix C2 or C3, characterized in that a specific performance-based image performance is executed in the opening performance.

[Appendix C5]
The production determining means (51) is such that the information game specific production subject image production in the trigger game image production displays half or more of the production subjects among the plurality of production subjects as the specific production subject. The gaming machine according to appendix C4, wherein in some cases, the special game specific performance main image performance in which half or more of the performance main characters are displayed is executed in the opening performance.

[Appendix C6]
The performance execution means (51) executes the special game specific performance-based image performance in at least one of the opening and the first unit game, which is determined according to the type of the trigger game image performance. The gaming machine described in appendix C1 characterized by:

[Appendix C7]
The notification game specific performance main image performance includes a first notification game specific performance main image performance that belongs to a first performance group, and a second notification game specific performance main image performance that belongs to a second performance group different from the first performance group. including
The performance execution means (51)
When the trigger game image performance is the first notification game specific performance-based image performance, executing the special game specific performance-based image performance at the opening;
The gaming machine according to appendix C6, characterized in that when the trigger game image performance is the second notification game specific performance-based image performance, the special game specific performance-based image performance is executed in the first unit game. .

[Appendix C8]
The first notification game specific performance-based image performance is a performance executed when the playing time in the notification game is longer than the second notification game specific performance-based image performance, as described in appendix C7. gaming machines.

[Appendix C9]
The first notification game specific performance based image performance is such that the degree of expectation that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state is higher than the second notification game specific performance based image performance. The gaming machine according to appendix C7, characterized in that the performance is also high.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices C2 to C9, the special game specific performance main image performance is performed in the opening or the first unit game depending on the type of the trigger game image performance and the type of the specific performance main body in the trigger game image performance. executed. In this way, in this gaming machine, special game specific performance subject image performances are executed regarding performance subjects that are grouped according to the type of opportunity game image performance and the type of specific performance subject in the opportunity game image performance. Thereby, the special game can be enjoyed in an appearance that reflects the trigger game image production in the information game that triggered the transition to the special game. In particular, special game specific performance image productions such as All Cast Reach where multiple production subjects appear as specific production subjects are executed at the opening, allowing you to enjoy the afterglow while reflecting the trigger game image production. I can do it.

[Appendix C10]
The special game includes a first special game (5R normal jackpot game) and a second special game (16R probability variable jackpot game) that have different advantages for the player,
The performance execution means (51) determines to execute the special game specific performance-based image performance in at least one of the opening and the first unit game, which is determined according to the type of the special game. The gaming machine according to appendix C1, characterized in that:

[Appendix C11]
The notification gaming state includes a first notification gaming state (low probability mode) and a second notification in which the probability that the determining means (41) determines that the transition to the special gaming state is higher than the first notification gaming state. including a gaming state (high probability mode);
The first special game is one that is transferred to the first notification game state after the first special game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix C10, wherein the second special game is shifted to the second notification game state after the second special game ends.

[Appendix C12]
The performance execution means (51)
If it is the first special game, executing the special game specific performance-based image performance in the first unit game;
The gaming machine according to appendix C11, characterized in that, in the case of the second special game, the special game specific performance-based image performance is executed in the opening.

[Appendix C13]
The gaming machine according to appendix C10, wherein the first special game and the second special game have different numbers of the plurality of unit games.

[Appendix C14]
The second special game is one in which a larger number of the unit games are executed than the first special game,
The performance execution means (51)
If it is the first special game, executing the special game specific performance-based image performance at the opening;
The gaming machine according to appendix C10, characterized in that, in the case of the second special game, the special game specific performance-based image performance is executed in the first unit game.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices C10 to C14, the special game specific performance-based image performance is executed in the opening or the first unit game depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the special game in a manner that reflects the determination result (playing state of the special game) of the variable game that triggered the transition to the special game. For example, when the second special game state is more advantageous for the player, a special game specific performance-based image performance is executed at the opening. As a result, in the case of an advantageous second special game, the player can perform the opportunity game image production in the special game at the opening that is executed before the unit game, that is, immediately after the end of the special game, while leaving the afterglow of the special game. You can enjoy the specific direction of the show.

[Appendix C15]
The performance execution means (51) is characterized in that in the unit game executed after the end of the first unit game among the plurality of unit games, a performance other than the special game specific performance-based image performance is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C14.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix C15, it is possible to prevent the special game specific performance-based image performance from being repeatedly executed. Thereby, the player can enjoy the special game specific performance-based image performance only in the opening or first unit game where the aftereffects of the notification game performance remain large.

[Appendix C16]
The performance execution means (51) executes the special game in any of the unit games to be executed after the first unit game among the plurality of unit games is completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C15, characterized in that it executes a specific performance-based image performance.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix C16, when a predetermined condition is met, for example, when the specific presentation entity is the same as the selection entity selected by the player, the special game specification is performed in the unit game to be executed after the first unit game ends. A presentation-based image presentation is executed. Therefore, when the special game specific performance main image performance is executed in a game other than the opening and the first unit game, the player can use the image to confirm the special game specific performance main image performance for the specific performance main character in the notification game performance. It becomes possible to draw attention to the display means. This allows the viewer to actively appreciate the performance for a performance entity other than the specific performance entity, and provides an opportunity to confirm the quality of the performance entity other than the specific performance entity.

[Appendix D1]
A determining means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the establishment of a determination condition;
main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41);
An image display means (341) in which a notification game image performance (variable game performance) is executed in the notification game that notifies the determination result, and a special game image performance (jackpot game performance) is executed in the special game;
performance execution means for causing the image display means (341) to execute the notification game image performance and the special game image performance;
Equipped with
The information game image production is a specific production-based image production (production character production such as super reach production, special reach production, etc.) in which a specific production subject (production character) among a plurality of production subjects (characters) is primarily displayed. including;
The special game image production is a specific selection subject image production (specific character) executed in the image display means (341) with a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by the player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters) as a subject. (direction), including
When the special game state is transitioned to, the performance execution means is configured such that when the special game state is transitioned to, the trigger game image performance that has been executed at a predetermined timing of the notification game that triggered the transition to the special game state is the specific performance main image. In the case of a performance, the gaming machine is characterized in that the specific selection subject image performance is executed on the condition that the specific performance subject in the specific performance subject image production is the same as the specific selection subject.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D1, when the specific presentation subject in the trigger game image presentation that is being executed at a predetermined timing is the same as the specific selection subject, the specific presentation subject (i.e., the specific selection subject) in the special game A specific selection-based image rendering is executed for the selected image. Therefore, in the special game, the player can fully enjoy the specific performance subject (specific selection subject) that the player is attached to.

[Appendix D2]
The special game includes an opening and a plurality of unit games that transition after the opening ends and provide gaming value to the player,
When the specific performance subject in the trigger game image production is the same as the specific selection subject, the production execution means (51) executes the opening and a predetermined specific unit game among the plurality of unit games. The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein in at least one of the above, the specific selection-based image effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D2, the specific selection-based image presentation of the special game is executed at least in the opening and the specific unit game. Therefore, the player can also enjoy the specific performance subject (specific selection subject) in the trigger game image production of the variable game that triggered the shift to the special game, even in the special game.

[Appendix D3]
When the specific presentation entity in the opportunity game image presentation is the same as the specific selection entity, the performance determining means (51) controls the specific selection entity image presentation in both the opening and the specific unit game. The gaming machine according to appendix D2.

[Appendix D4]
The specific selection subject image rendering includes a first specific selection subject image rendering and a second specific selection subject image rendering different from the first specific selection subject image rendering,
When the specific performance subject in the trigger game image production is the same as the specific selection subject, the production execution means (51) executes the first selection subject image production in the opening, and executes the first selection subject image production in the opening. The gaming machine according to appendix D3, wherein the second selection-based image effect is executed in the game machine.

According to the gaming machines according to Appendix D3 and D4, as a benefit of the fact that the specific presentation subject is the same as the specific selection subject, the specific selection subject image production of the special game is executed both in the opening and in the specific unit game. . Therefore, in both the opening and the specific unit game, the player can change the specific performance subject (specific selection subject) in the trigger game image production of the variable game that triggered the transition to the special game as a different performance. You can enjoy it times.

[Appendix D5]
The notification gaming state includes a first notification gaming state (low probability mode) and a second notification gaming state (low probability mode) in which the probability that the determining means determines that the transition to the special gaming state is higher than the first notification gaming state ( high probability mode);
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that transitions to the first notification gaming state after the special game ends, and a transition to the second notification gaming state after the special game ends. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state, a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state),
The performance determining means (51) is configured to perform the above-mentioned performance determining means (51) on the condition that, when the specific performance subject in the trigger game image performance is the same as the specific performance subject, the special game state is the second special game state. The gaming machine according to appendix D4, wherein the first specific selection-based image performance is executed in the opening, and the second specific selection-based image effect is executed in the specific unit game.

[Appendix D6]
a reservation means for suspending the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means up to a predetermined upper limit;
Holding result storage means for storing the determination result for the holding notification game held by the holding means;
Furthermore,
When the specific performance entity in the trigger game image performance is the same as the specific selection entity, the performance execution means (51) executes one of the judgment results for the reservation notification game stored in the suspension result storage means. includes a transition to the special game state after execution of the pending notification game, the first specific selection-based image effect is executed in the opening, and the first specific selection-based image effect is executed in the specific unit game. 2. The gaming machine according to appendix D4, which executes a specific selection-based image production.

According to the gaming machines according to Appendix D5 and Appendix D6, in addition to the specific presentation subject being the same as the specific selection subject, the opening and specific unit games can be played on the condition that the specific presentation subject and the specific selection subject are the same, and that the situation is advantageous to the player. Specific selection-based image rendering is executed on both sides. That is, on the condition that it is the second special game or that the pending consecutive games are confirmed, the specific selection-based image production is executed in both the opening and the specific unit game. When the specific selection-based image performance is executed in both games, the player can know that the situation is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in addition to the opening, the player can enjoy the special game by paying attention to whether a specific selection-based image effect is executed in a specific unit game.

[Appendix D7]
When the specific performance entity in the trigger game image performance is the same as the specific selection entity, the performance execution means may perform a non-specific unit game other than the specific unit game among the plurality of unit games, The gaming machine according to appendix D2, which executes a performance other than the specific selection-based image performance.

[Appendix D8]
The notification gaming state includes a first notification gaming state (low probability mode) and a second notification gaming state (low probability mode) in which the probability that the determining means determines that the transition to the special gaming state is higher than the first notification gaming state ( high probability mode);
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that transitions to the first notification gaming state after the special game ends, and a transition to the second notification gaming state after the special game ends. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state, a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state),
The performance execution means (51) executes the above-mentioned performance on condition that the special game state is the second special game state when the specific performance subject in the trigger game image performance is the same as the specific selection subject. The gaming machine according to appendix D7, characterized in that, in a non-specific unit game, the specific selection-based image production is executed.

[Appendix D9]
a reservation means for suspending the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means up to a predetermined upper limit;
Holding result storage means for storing the determination result for the holding notification game held by the holding means;
Furthermore,
When the specific performance entity in the trigger game image performance is the same as the specific selection entity, the performance execution means (51) executes one of the judgment results for the reservation notification game stored in the suspension result storage means. Supplementary note characterized in that, in the non-specific unit game, the specific selection-based image production is executed on the condition that the above-mentioned pending notification game includes a transition to the special game state after execution of the pending notification game. The gaming machine described in D7.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices D7 to D9, execution of the specific selection subject image performance for the specific performance subject (that is, the specific selection subject) is restricted outside of the opening and a specific round. Therefore, the player can enjoy the specific selection-based image effect as a specialized effect that can be executed in the opening and in a specific unit game. On the other hand, in a non-specific unit game, on the condition that the special game state is the second special game state (for example, variable probability game state) or that it is confirmed that the reserved consecutive games will be executed after the end of the special game. , a specific selection subject image rendering is executed. That is, only when the situation is advantageous to the player, the specific selection subject image effect is executed in a non-specific unit game. Therefore, in order to confirm whether the situation is advantageous to the player, the player pays attention to whether the specific selection-based image effect is executed in a non-specific unit game. Thereby, the player can enjoy the special game by paying attention to the performance in the non-specific unit game and checking whether the situation is advantageous to him/her.

[Appendix D10]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D2 to D9, wherein the specific unit game is a first unit game executed first in the plurality of unit games.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D10, after the end of the variable game, the specific selection subject image performance is executed in a series of steps such as opening → first unit game (first unit game) in the special game. Therefore, the player, with the afterglow of the trigger game image performance in the variable game that triggered the transition to the special game, can continue from the end of the trigger game image performance to the series of opening and first unit games. You can also enjoy the special performance subject (specific selection subject) according to the flow.

[Appendix D11]
The specific selection subject image performance includes a normal specific performance subject image performance that is executed by the performance execution means (51) when the specific performance subject in the trigger game image performance is different from the specific selection subject, and the trigger game image performance. The game according to appendix D1, characterized in that it includes a special specific performance-based image performance that is executed by the performance execution means (51) when the specific performance subject in the image performance is the same as the specific selection subject. Machine.

[Appendix D12]
The notification gaming state includes a first notification gaming state (low probability mode) and a second notification gaming state (low probability mode) in which the probability that the determining means determines that the transition to the special gaming state is higher than the first notification gaming state ( high probability mode);
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that transitions to the first notification gaming state after the special game ends, and a transition to the second notification gaming state after the special game ends. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state, a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state),
The performance execution means (51) executes the above-mentioned performance on condition that the special game state is the second special game state when the specific performance subject in the trigger game image performance is the same as the specific selection subject. The gaming machine according to appendix D11, characterized in that the specific selection subject image effect is executed as the specific selection subject image effect.

[Appendix D13]
a reservation means for suspending the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means up to a predetermined upper limit;
Holding result storage means for storing the determination result for the holding notification game held by the holding means;
Furthermore,
When the specific performance subject in the trigger game image performance is the same as the specific selection subject, the production determining means includes the judgment result for the suspension notification game stored in the suspension result storage means. According to appendix D11, the specific selection-based image performance is executed as the specific selection-based image performance, provided that the game includes a transition to the special game state after execution of the hold notification game. Game machine.

[Appendix D14]
The special game includes an opening and a plurality of unit games that transition after the opening ends and provide gaming value to the player,
When the specific performance subject in the trigger game image production is the same as the specific selection subject, the production execution means (51) executes the opening and the first unit game to be executed first in the plurality of unit games. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D11 to D13, wherein in at least one of the above, the specific selection subject image production is executed as the specific selection subject image production.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices D11 to D14, the special specific selection subject image performance is executed on the condition that the specific performance subject and the specific selection subject are the same. That is, the player can enjoy the special specific selection subject image performance as a benefit of the fact that the specific performance subject and the specific selection subject are the same.

[Appendix E1]
A determining means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the establishment of a determination condition;
main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41);
the special game, and A performance means (341, etc.) by which a game performance (jackpot game performance, variable game performance) is executed in a notification game (variable game) that notifies the determination result;
performance execution means (51) for causing the performance means (341, etc.) to execute the game performance;
Equipped with
The game performance includes, as the game performance performed in the special game, a specific selection subject image performance (specific character performance) performed in the image display means (341) with the selection subject as the main character, and the image display means (341), including a visibility inhibiting performance that inhibits the visibility of the performance performed in (341),
A gaming machine characterized in that the performance execution means (51) executes the specific selection-based image performance before executing the visibility inhibition performance, and does not execute the specific selection-based image performance after the performance of the visibility inhibition performance. .

[Appendix E2]
The presentation means (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) movable between a standby position where the display screen of the image display means (341) is covered with a low coverage ratio and an operating position where the coverage ratio is high. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein the visibility inhibition effect is a movable member operation effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the actuation position.

[Appendix E3]
The visibility inhibition effect is such that in a visible layer of a multi-layered image obtained by superimposing a plurality of images, an information notification image (831, 851, 861, 871, etc.) that reports predetermined information is displayed on the image display means (341). ) The gaming machine according to appendix E1 or E2, characterized in that the effect is displayed on the screen.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices E1 to E3, the specific selection subject image performance is performed before the visibility inhibition performance is performed, and the specific selection subject image performance is not performed after the performance of the visibility inhibition performance. Therefore, it is possible to use the specific selection subject image performance as a predictive performance that the visibility inhibition performance will be executed. For example, the specific selection subject image performance can be a foreshadowing performance that a movable member operation performance will be executed or that an information notification image will be displayed. Therefore, by executing the specific selection subject image production, the player can predict that the movable member operation production will be executed and that the information notification image will be displayed. The special game can be enjoyed while paying attention to whether the image presentation is executed.

[Appendix F1]
A determining means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the establishment of a determination condition;
main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41);
the special game, and A performance means (341, etc.) by which a game performance (jackpot game performance, variable game performance) is executed in a notification game (variable game) that notifies the determination result;
performance determining means (41) for determining the game performance to be executed by the performance means (341, etc.);
performance execution means (51) for causing the performance means (341, etc.) to execute the game performance;
Equipped with
The game performance is
As the game performance executed in the information game, there is an information game specific performance-based image performance (super reach performance, special reach performance) in which a specific performance subject (performance character) among a plurality of production subjects (characters) is actively displayed. Including production character production such as production,
The game performance executed in the special game includes a special game specific performance main image performance (specific character performance) in which the specific performance main character is displayed proactively, and a performance executed in the image display means (341). A visibility obstructing effect that obstructs visibility,
The performance execution means (51) is configured to trigger the transition to the special gaming state when the performance determining means (51) determines that the visual recognition obstructing performance is executed and the transition to the special gaming state is made. If the trigger game image performance that was being executed at a predetermined timing of the notification game that has become the notification game is the notification game specific performance-based image performance, the specific selection-based image performance is executed.

[Appendix F2]
The presentation means (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) movable between a standby position where the display screen of the image display means (341) is covered with a low coverage ratio and an operating position where the coverage ratio is high. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to appendix F1, wherein the visual recognition inhibition effect is a movable member operation effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the actuation position.

[Appendix F3]
The visibility inhibition effect is such that in a visible layer of a multi-layered image obtained by superimposing a plurality of images, an information notification image (831, 851, 861, 871, etc.) that reports predetermined information is displayed on the image display means (341). ) The gaming machine according to appendix F1 or F2, characterized in that the effect is displayed on the screen.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices F1 to F3, when the visual recognition inhibiting performance is scheduled to be executed, the special game specific performance-based image performance is executed when the trigger game image performance is the notification game specific performance-based image performance. Therefore, it is possible to use the specific selection subject image performance as a predictive performance that the visibility inhibition performance will be executed. For example, the specific selection subject image performance can be a foreshadowing performance that a movable member operation performance will be executed or that an information notification image will be displayed. Therefore, by executing the specific selection subject image production, the player can predict that the movable member operation production will be executed and that the information notification image will be displayed. The special game can be enjoyed while paying attention to whether the image presentation is executed.

[Appendix G1]
A determining means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the establishment of a determination condition;
main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41);
the special game, and A performance means (341, etc.) by which a game performance (jackpot game performance, variable game performance) is executed in a notification game (variable game) that notifies the determination result;
performance execution means (51) for causing the performance means to execute the game performance;
Equipped with
The special game includes an opening and a plurality of unit games (round games) that transition after the opening ends and provide gaming value (game balls) to the player,
The game performance includes, as the game performance performed in the special game, a specific selection subject image performance (specific character performance) performed in the image display means (341) with the selection subject as the main character, and the image display means (341), including a visibility inhibiting performance that inhibits the visibility of the performance performed in (341),
The performance execution means (51) executes the specific selection in both the opening and a predetermined specific unit game among the plurality of unit games before executing the visibility inhibiting performance in the special game. A game machine characterized by executing a main image performance.

[Appendix G2]
The presentation means (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) movable between a standby position where the display screen of the image display means (341) is covered with a low coverage ratio and an operating position where the coverage ratio is high. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to appendix G1, wherein the visual recognition inhibition effect is a movable member operation effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the actuation position.

[Appendix G3]
The visibility inhibition effect is such that in a visible layer of a multi-layered image obtained by superimposing a plurality of images, an information notification image (831, 851, 861, 871, etc.) that reports predetermined information is displayed on the image display means (341). ) The gaming machine according to appendix G1 or G2, characterized in that the effect is displayed on the screen.

According to the gaming machines according to notes G1 to G3, the specific selection subject image effect is executed a plurality of times before the visibility inhibition effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to use the fact that the specific selection subject image effect is executed multiple times as a predictive effect. For example, it is possible to use the fact that a specific selection-based image effect is executed a plurality of times as a sign effect that a visibility inhibition effect will be executed. For example, the execution of a specific selection subject image effect multiple times can be used as a predictive effect that a movable member operation effect will be executed or that an information notification image will be displayed. Therefore, by executing the specific selection-based image effect multiple times, the player can predict that the movable member operation effect will be executed and that the information notification image will be displayed. The special game can be enjoyed while paying attention to whether the selection-based image performance is executed a plurality of times.

[Appendix H1]
A determining means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the establishment of a determination condition;
main control means (41) that controls the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means (41);
the special game, and A performance means (341, etc.) by which a game performance (jackpot game performance, variable game performance) is executed in a notification game (variable game) that notifies the determination result;
performance execution means (51) for causing the performance means (341, etc.) to execute the game performance;
Equipped with
The game performance includes, as the game performance executed in the special game, a specific selection subject image production (specific character production) executed in the image display means (341) with the specific selection subject as the subject, and the image display. A visibility inhibiting performance that inhibits the visibility of the performance executed in the means (341),
When executing the visibility inhibiting performance in the special game, the performance execution means (51) sets the timing for executing the visibility inhibiting performance, and then executes the specified at a timing different from the timing for executing the visibility inhibiting performance. A gaming machine characterized by having means for setting so that a selection-based image effect is executed.

[Appendix H2]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that provide game value (game balls) to the player,
The performance execution means (51) is
Executing the visibility inhibition effect at a first timing set in a first period in which a unit game selected from the plurality of unit games is executed;
The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed at a second timing set in a second period other than the first period in the special game.

[Appendix H3]
The special game further includes an opening before executing a plurality of unit games,
The gaming machine according to appendix H2, wherein the second period is a period other than the opening and the unit game in which the visibility inhibiting effect among the plurality of unit games is executed.

In the gaming machines according to appendices H1 to H3, in the special game, the specific selection subject image performance for the specific selection subject selected by the player is performed at a timing different from the visibility inhibition performance, for example, a unit game in which the visibility inhibition performance is executed. It is executed with a different unit game or opening. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the specific selection subject image performance in the special game without obstructing the visibility of the specific selection subject image performance due to the visibility inhibiting performance. Further, the specific selection-based image effect is affected by the execution timing of the visibility inhibition effect, but is executed at various timings including the opening. Therefore, if you want to see a specific selection-based image effect, it is necessary to pay attention to the image display means from the start of the special game, so it is difficult to make the player concentrate on the effect executed by the image display means. It becomes possible. This makes it possible for the player to enjoy the performance intended by the gaming machine in the special game. For example, providing an opportunity to view an image effect for a selection entity other than the specific selection entity selected by the player, and providing motivation for the player to select a selection entity other than the currently selected specific selection entity as a new specific selection entity. I can do it.

[Appendix H4]
The visibility inhibiting effect is such that in a visible layer of a multi-layered image obtained by overlapping a plurality of images, an information notification image (831, 851, 861, 871, etc.) that reports predetermined information is displayed on the image display means (341). ), the gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H3.

[Appendix H5]
The information notification image indicates that the cumulative value (cumulative number of balls played) of the gaming value (gaming balls) given to the player has reached a predetermined gaming value during the execution period of one or more of the special games that satisfy predetermined conditions. The gaming machine according to appendix H4, characterized in that the image (861) notifies that the limit has been exceeded.

[Appendix H6]
The notification gaming state includes a first notification gaming state (low probability mode) and a second notification in which the probability that the determining means (41) determines that the transition to the special gaming state is higher than the first notification gaming state. including a gaming state (high probability mode);
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that transitions to the first notification gaming state after the special game ends, and a transition to the second notification gaming state after the special game ends. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state, a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state),
The gaming machine according to appendix H4 or H5, wherein the information notification image is an image (831) that suggests or clearly indicates that the special gaming state is the second special gaming state.

[Appendix H7]
a reservation means (41) for suspending the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit;
a suspension result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the suspension notification game suspended by the suspension means (41);
Furthermore,
The information notification image includes a judgment result for the reservation notification game stored in the reservation result storage means (412) that causes the game to transition to the special game state after the execution of the reservation notification game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H4 to H6, characterized in that the image (851) suggests or clearly indicates that.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices H4 to H7, it is possible to prevent the specific selection subject image performance from being obstructed by various information notification images that serve as visual recognition obstructing performances.

[Appendix H8]
The presentation means (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) movable between a standby position where the display screen of the image display means (341) is covered with a low coverage ratio and an operating position where the coverage ratio is high. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H7, wherein the visibility inhibition performance is a movable member operation performance in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operation position.

[Appendix H9]
The notification gaming state includes a first notification gaming state (low probability mode) and a second notification in which the probability that the determining means (41) determines that the transition to the special gaming state is higher than the first notification gaming state. including a gaming state (high probability mode);
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) that transitions to the first notification gaming state after the special game ends, and a transition to the second notification gaming state after the special game ends. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state, a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state),
The gaming machine according to appendix H8, wherein the movable member operation performance is a performance that suggests or clearly indicates that the special game state is the second special game state.

[Appendix H10]
a reservation means (41) for suspending the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit;
a suspension result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the suspension notification game suspended by the suspension means (41);
Furthermore,
The movable member actuation effect includes, among the determination results for the reservation notification game stored in the reservation result storage means (412), a transition to the special game state after execution of the reservation notification game. The gaming machine according to appendix H8 or H9, characterized in that the performance suggests or clearly indicates that a player is present.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices H8 to H10, it is possible to prevent the specific selection-based image performance from being obstructed by various performances such as a movable member operation performance, a promotion performance, and a hold consecutive winnings confirmation performance, which are visual recognition obstructing performances. can.

10: Game machine 20: Operation button 20a: Operation switch 21: Selection deciding section 21A: Selection button 211: Up selection button 212: Down selection button 213: Left selection button 214: Right selection buttons 211a to 211d: Selection operation switch 21B: Determination button 21Ba: Determination operation switch 26: Speaker 316: Variable prize opening 331: Main control unit 332: Sub control unit 341: Symbol display section 39: Movable accessory member 4: Main control device 41: MPU
411:ROM
412:RAM
5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
511:ROM
512:RAM
6: Display control device 61: MPU
611:ROM
612: RAM
714: Selected character 74: Character selection screen 741 to 747: Character selection image 81: Round game production screen 811: Round display image 812: Jackpot round number display image 813: Character introduction image 82: Button operation request screen 821: Operation button image 83: Promotion success effect screen 84: Promotion failure effect screen 85: Hold consecutive winnings confirmation display screen 86: Specific number of balls displayed image display screen 87: Error occurrence image display screen

Claims (1)

A determining means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
main control means for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means;
a subject effect display means for determining and displaying a specific selection subject effect from a plurality of selection subject effects when a player performs a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation means;
A production means for executing a game production in the special game and the notification game that notifies the determination result;
performance execution means for causing the performance means to execute the game performance;
Equipped with
The game performance is a specific subject image production that is displayed as an image game production performed in the special game using a subject that corresponds to the specific selected subject production, and whose display timing is set at the start of the special game; a visibility inhibiting image effect that is displayed in front of a predetermined game image effect displayed in the special game, thereby obstructing the visibility of the predetermined game image effect;
The visual recognition inhibiting image effect is displayed when a predetermined condition different from the determination result of the determination means for the special game is satisfied during the execution of the special game, and the display timing is set at the start of the special game. It is an image production that does not
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined special game state, the visibility inhibiting image performance is set so that the specific subject image performance and the visibility inhibiting image performance are displayed at different timings without overlapping.

Images